Home

User's Manual

1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 e Reset Figure 4 2 18 EEE Configuration Page Screenshot 75 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical EEE port means to select all ports of Industrial Managed Switch e EEE Enable Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port e EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmition of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmsion until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 76 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 16 Web Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Industrial Managed Switch The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 19 appears Firmware Update Figure 4 2 19 Web Firmware Upgrade Page Screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 19 3 Click the home button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware Upload 4 Select on the firmware then click Unoa the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status
2. Emergency Call Service Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP No entries present Add New Policy Figure 4 14 2 LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbor h
3. e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the Switch source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MLD SFM Information gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 182 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 14 MVR The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs In a multicast television application a PC or a network television or a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast group address Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports It is allowed to create at maximun 8 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel settings for each Multicast VLAN There will be totally at maximun 256 group addresses for channel settings This page provides MVR related configuration The MVR screen in F
4. Object Description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP Address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP Address Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry e HTTP HTTPS Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface that the host IP address matched the entry e SNMP Indicates the host can access the switch from SNMP interface that the host IP address matched the entry e TELNET SSH Buttons Add New Entry Save Click to save changes Indicates the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface that the host IP address matched the entry Click to add a new access management entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 278 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics This page provides statistics for access management The Access Management Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 3 appears Access Management Statistics Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets 0 0 TELNET SSH 0 0 0 0 0 Auto refresh 7 Refresh Clear Figure 4 12 3 Access Management Statistic
5. 352 IP NTP Configuration Description Show NTP configuration Syntax IP NTP Configuration Default Setting IP NTP Configuration NTP Mode Disabled Idx Server IP host address a b c d or a host name string 1 pool ntp org 2 europe pool ntp org 3 north america pool ntp org 4 asia pool ntp org 5 oceania pool ntp org IP NTP Mode Description Set or show the NTP mode Syntax IP NTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable NTP mode disable Disable NTP mode default Show NTP mode Default Setting disable 353 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable NTP mode IGS 10020MT gt ip ntp mode enable IP NTP Server Add Description Add NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Add lt server_index gt lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example To add NTP server IGS 10020MT gt ip ntp server add 1 60 249 136 151 IP NTP Server IPv6 Add Description Add NTP server IPv6 entry Syntax IP NTP Server Ipv6 Add lt server_index gt lt server_ipv6 gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 lt server_ipv6 gt Pv6 server address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example f
6. IGMP SFM Information Auto refresh E Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Hardware Filter Switch No more entries Figure 4 8 10 IGMP SFM Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the Switch source IPv4 address could be handled by chip or not Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refiesh Click to refresh the page immediate k Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt LJ Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 175 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configuration This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration The MLD Snooping Configu
7. 430 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Example Show DHCP relay configuration IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp relay configuration DHCP Relay Configuration DHCP Relay Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Server NULL DHCP Relay Information Mode Disabled DHCP Relay Information Policy replace Security Network DHCP Relay Mode Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relaly mode When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered disable Disable DHCP relaly mode default Show flow DHCP relaly mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP relay mode IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp relay mode enable 431 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Network DHCP Relay Server Description Show or set DHCP relay server Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting null Example Set DHCP relay server in 192 168 0 20 IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp relay server 192 168 0 20 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode Des
8. 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears The system will load the new software after reboot Firmware update in progress The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will restart after the update Until then do not reset or power off the device Y Completed Figure 4 2 20 Software successfully Loaded Notice Screen DO NOT Power OFF the Industrial Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 77 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 17 TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Industrial Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The TFTP Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 21 appears TFTP Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Firmware File Name Figure 4 2 21 TFTP Firmware Update Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Firmware File Name The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Buttons Upgrade Click to
9. Default Setting disable Example Enable limit aging IGS 10020MT gt security network limit aging enable Security Network Limit Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on learned MAC addresses Syntax Security Network Limit Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time in seconds between checks for activity on a MAC address 10 10000000 seconds default Show current age time 414 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting 3600 Example Set age time in 100sec IGS 10020MT gt security network limit agetime 100 Security Network Limit Port Description Set or show per port enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Port lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port security on this port disable Disable port security on this port default Show current port enabledness of port security limit control Default Setting disable Example Enable port limit for port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network limit port 1 enable Security Network Limit Limit Description Set or show the max number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this set of ports Syntax Security Network Limit Limit lt port_list gt lt limit gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt limit gt Max number of MAC addresses on this port
10. Default Setting disable QoS DSCP Classification Mode Description Set or show DSCP ingress classification mode If port DSCP classification is selected DSCP will be classified based on QoS class and DP level only for DSCP value with classification mode enabled DSCP may be translated DSCP if translation is enabled for the port Syntax QoS DSCP Classification Mode lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all enable Enable DSCP ingress classification disable Disable DSCP ingress classification default Show DSCP classification mode Default Setting disable 495 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS DSCP EgressRemap Description Set or show DSCP egress remap table This table is used if the port egress remarking mode is remap and the purpose is to map the DSCP and DP level to a new DSCP value Syntax QoS DSCP EgressRemap lt dscp_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt dscp gt Egress remapped DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS Storm Unicast Description Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable unicast storm control disable Disa
11. Restricted F Port STP Path Cost Admin Edge Auto Edge BPDU Guard Point to Enabled Ea point D Auto w 128 w Non Edge F 5 a A Forced True CIST Normal Port Configuration Restricted E Path Cost Pony Admin Edge Auto peal al CN Guard a lt All gt lt Al gt x lt All gt E z 1 0 Auto w 128 w Non Edge x Y Auto x 2 Auto e 128 Non Edge x Y DO E Auto y 3 A Auto w 128 w Non Edge x y Auto x 4 b Auto 128 w Non Edge y F M E Auto y 5 B Auto w 128 w Non Edge w 7 Auto y 6 Oo Auto e 128 Non Edge x y Auto x 7 A Auto x 128 w Non Edge y 7 Auto x 8 a Auto w 128 w Non Edge w 7 Auto y 9 Auto 128 w Non Edge y El Auto y 10 ia Auto 128 Non Edge x y n E Fl Auto x Figure 4 7 6 STP CIST Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e STP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port means to select all ports of Industrial Managed Switch e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can
12. The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over 294 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh i i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Car Flushes all dynamic entries e Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt e Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Start from Pot1 v VLAN 1 MAC add
13. e Queriers Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Queriers Received The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leaves Received Buttons The number of Received V2 Leave Auto refresh i l Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate c J Clears all Statistics counters 173 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 6 IGMP Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The IGMP Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 9 appears IGMP Snooping Groups Information Auto refresh F Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members No more entries as vian crows gt ao e eo ro No more entrie
14. oooooccccnnoccconococnnononcncnononnnnnnnn cnn nn n cn attt rre rre rre 328 4 17 5 RMON Event Detail asadAd 329 4 17 06 RMON Event Status vico odo 330 417 7 RMON History ConfigUratiON ceiiricspeic tirao reitera 331 4 17 8 RMON History Detail T a e ra a e aa e e a a E eiee 332 4 17 9 RMON History Stats rien eaen e ae 333 4 17 10 RMON Statistics Configuration 0 eee cee eeeeeeeeeeenaeeeceeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeeeneeeesenaeeeeeenaees 335 4 17 11 RMON Statistics Detalla ise nda de uae ee ee etnies 336 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE sscitnciciniacrtcairiia ae 338 BA ACCOSSING tC CL isa wct tesa c aa 338 5 2 LEUNG t LOGIN aae secede AAN 338 6 COMMAND LINE MODE siiisciicictctesnsccatacnccacteanantneucnenerasanananauenacstcurcansseuanancadaduersnaeacaucncndeds 339 6 1 System COMA di 340 System Configuration eee aa aca 340 System Log COMMOUPALIOM css ad ida ri ads ales 340 System VETO A tada 341 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT System Log Server Mode cti ii 341 SYSTEM NM a ei 342 system Conta e eaa ten Dads eee nce a Dade cone 342 system Log Server Adde S ii rea Rain 343 system Location A A ee 343 System Log Le Vel iii A a 344 System TIMEZONE siirre aikeinaan aia ritos redee inspecci n 345 System Log LOOKUP siar a da 345 Systemi Red ie eed te ee eee cede tee a E E N ae aaie 346 System Restore Defaults msira ea aaae n Aa AAEE acia 346 Systemi Load A aii 347 6 2 IP COMMAN AAA aaee eaa aa aaea eaa a
15. 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 16 appears Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Rate pps Unicast O 1 v Multicast F 1 v Broadcast O 1 v Figure 4 9 16 Storm Control Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here unicast multicast Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 209 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 14 QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 17 appears
16. Click to refresh the page immediate 316 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 15 Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnastics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items m Ping m IPv6 Ping m Remote IP Ping m Cable Diagnostics PING The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The Managed Switch transmit ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performing tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the Cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follow m If the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1000Base T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m If the link is established in 100Base TX or 10Base T the Cable Diagnostics cause the link to drop while the diagnostics are ru
17. Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 11 appears DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Relay Server Relay Information Mode Relay Information Policy Figure 4 2 11 DHCP Relay Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When enable DHCP relay mode operation the agent forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t flood for security considered Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes Mode are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remove it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Indicates the DHCP relay information opt
18. Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror screen in Figure 4 4 8 appears Mirror Configuration Port to mirror to Disabled w Mirror Port Configuration lt All gt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled EN KI KI KI KI KI KI EI EIKI EI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Save Reset Figure 4 4 8 Mirror Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port to mirror on Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored Both Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the mirror port es For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on HA Not the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only ote 107 User s Manual of IGS 100
19. Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 474 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lt policy_list gt List of policies to delete LLDPMED Coordinates Description Set or show LLDP MED Location Syntax LLDPMED Coordinates latitude longitude altitude north south west east meters floor coordinate_value Parameters latitude Latitude 0 to 90 degress with max 4 digits Positive numbers are north of the equator and negative numbers are south of the equator longitude Longitude 0 to 180 degress with max 4 digits Positive values are East of the prime meridian and negative numbers are West of the prime meridian altitude Altitude Meters or floors with max 4 digits default Show coordinate location configuration north south west east meters floor North North Valid for latitude South South Valid for latitude West West Valid for longitude East East Valid for longitude Meters Meters Valid for altitude Floor Floor Valid for altitude lldpmed Coordinate value coordinate_value lldpmed Coordinate value LLDPMED Datum Description Set or show LLDP MED Coordinates map datum Syntax LLDPMED Datum wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw 475 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters wgs84 nad83_navd88 nad83_mllw wgs84 WGS84 nad83_navd88 NAD83_NAVD88 nad83_mllw NAD83_ MLLW lldpmed Coordinate datum LLDPMED Fast Description Set or show
20. Port 7 Port 24 About the VLAN ports connect to the hosts please refer to 4 6 10 1 examples The following steps will focus on the VLAN Trunk port configuration 1 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port 2 Assign Port 8 to both VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 at the VLAN Member configuration page 3 Define a VLAN 1 as a Public Area that overlapping with both VLAN 2 members and VLAN 3 members 137 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 Assign the VLAN Trunk Port to be the member of each VLAN which wants to be aggregated At this sample add Port 8 to be VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 member port The screen in Figure 4 6 12 appears Port Members _ Delete VAN vinnan iello MMMM O AA IML IL Figure 4 6 12 VLAN overlap port setting amp VLAN 1 The Public Area Member Assign 5 Specify Port 8 to be the 802 1Q VLAN Trunk port and the Trunking port must be a Tagged port while egress The Port 8 configuration as the following screen in Figure 4 6 13 8 O aly Tagged v Disable Y Figure 4 6 13 The configuration of VLAN Trunk Port That is although the VLAN 2 members Port 1 to Port 3 and VLAN 3 members Port 4 to Port 6 also belongs to VLAN 1 But with different PVID settings packets form VLAN 2 or VLAN 3 is not able to access to the other VLAN 6 Repeat Step 1 to 5 setup the VLAN Trunk port at the partner switch and add more VLANs to join the VLAN trunk repeat Step 1 to 3 to assign the Trunk port t
21. Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 62 4 2 6 NTP Configuration Configure NTP on this page User s Manual of IGS 10020MT NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP data grams as transport layer You can specify NTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The NTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 8 appears The page includes the following fields Timezone Object europe pool ntp org north america pool ntp org asla pool ntp org oceania pool ntp org NTP Configuration GMT 8 Beifing Chongqing Hong Kong Singapore Taipei pool ntp org Figure 4 2 8 NTP Configuration Page Screenshot Description e Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable NTP mode operation When NTP mode operation is enabled the agent forwards NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable NTP mode operation e Timezone Allow select the time zone according to current location of switch Buttons Save e Server Click to save changes Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol
22. unlimited Figure 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping e Unregistered IPMCv4 Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding Flooding enabled e IGMP SSM Range run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range e Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side e Proxy Enable join and leave messages to the router side e Router Port switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier 169 SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet User s Manual of IGS 10020MT If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port All means all ports will have one specific setting e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throtting The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to un
23. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Ingress Filter OOOOOO0O0000 Acceptable Set out layer Frame Link Type Q in Q Mode VLAN tag Type ether type UnTag v Disable 802 19 Tag UnTag Disable 802 19 Tag Tagged v Disable UnTag v Disable UnTag Disable Tagged v Disable UnTag Disable UnTag v Disable UnTag v Disable UnTag v Disable ing lt lt ii lt i ee EE See ee eee S SSS SSIS IIS Ig Figure 4 6 10 Port 1 Port 6 VLAN Configuration 136 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 1Q aware Switch The most cases are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access with other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 6 11 appears PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged gg ee ww ee FO ee a a we ee we ee ee ee ee eee ee eee es eee eee e ee l i I l 1 l l gt l I PC 1 PC 4 Untagged Untagged Sa tn re eng 5 e AA A A eee EY Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports
24. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized E A A A a ao Figure 4 11 4 Network Access Server Configuration Page Screenshot 236 Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enabled after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port e Reauthentication Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be Period reauthenticated This is only acti
25. 159 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Configuration Identification Object Description e Configuration Name The name identifiying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI Mapping Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLAN s mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space AVLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI A unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 160 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before di
26. An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az 548 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World W
27. Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames 190 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping For more detail information please refer to chapter 4 9 3 1 e DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 3 1 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification The clasification modes for tagged frames are configured on this page The QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification screen in Figure 4 9 3 appears Port 1 y QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification Port 1 Tagged Frames Settings Tag Classification PCP DEI to QoS Class DP Level Mapping Pcp DET Qos Cass DP Level F A Y a Of OF 20 242 O 20 20 230 O ENEE E CO CH ENE EN ETET SN OD On amp amp WwW WN NM OO 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 T 7 Save Reset Cancel Figure 4 9 3 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification Page Screenshot 191 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Object Description e Tag Classification Controls the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped version
28. Enable the Voice VLAN port security mode for port 1 4 IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan security 1 4 enable 6 22 Loop Protect Command Loop Protect Configuration Description Show Loop Protection configuration Syntax Loop Protect Configuration Loop Protect Mode Description Set or show the Loop Protection mode Syntax Loop Protect Mode enable disable 517 Parameters enable Enable Loop Protection disable Disable Loop Protection Default Setting enable Loop Protect Transmit Description Set or show the Loop Protection transmit interval Syntax Loop Protect Transmit lt transmit time gt Parameters Transmit time interval 1 10 seconds Default Setting 5 Loop Protect Shutdown Description Set or show the Loop Protection shutdown time Syntax Loop Protect Shutdown lt shutdown time gt Parameters Shutdown time interval 0 604800 seconds A value of zero disables re enabling the port Default Setting 10 518 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Loop Protect Port Configuration Description Show Loop Protection port configuration Syntax Loop Protect Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Loop Protect Port Mode Description Set or show the Loop Protection port mode Syntax Loop Protect Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or a
29. JEJEJE Discard Auto Copper Auto Fiber Auto Fiber 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ey KK KKKK KKK XK XXXXXXX Xxxox Save Reset Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Port Description This function provides input per port description and the available letters is 12 e Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port 98 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode All Setup whole ports with the same setting Auto Copper Setup Auto negotiation Auto Fiber Setup Auto negotiation 10 Half Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode 10 Full Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100 Half Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100 Full Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1000 Full Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode Disable Shutdown the port manually e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whe
30. LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx 466 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function IGS 10020MT gt lldp mode 1 enable LLDP Optional TLV Description Show or Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys_name sys_descr sys_capa mgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys_capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable 467 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 IGS 10020MT gt Ildp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LL
31. QoS Ingress Port Classification Page Screenshot Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled EEE E EEE EE 0 9 9 9 9 9 oO o o o E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 idad Oe 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e QoS Class The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority All means all ports will have one specific setting e DP Level The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way All means all ports will have one specific setting e PCP The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default PCP for untagged frames All means all ports will have one specific setting e DEI The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole ports Controls the default DEI for untagged frames All means all ports will have one specific setting e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port
32. QoS Port Classification Class Description Set or show the default QoS class Syntax QoS Port Classification Class lt port_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt QoS class 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set default QoS class in 1 for port 1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Classification Class 1 1 481 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port Classification DPL Description Set or show the default Drop Precedence Level Syntax QoS Port Classification DPL lt port_list gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default Drop Precedence Level in 1 for port IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Classification dpl 1 1 QoS Port Classification PCP Description Set or show the default PCP for an untagged frame Syntax QoS Port Classification PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default PCP for an untagged frame in 1 for port1 IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Classification pcp 1 1 482 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port Classification DEI Description Set or show the default DEI for an untagged frame Syntax
33. Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times lt retries gt Parameters lt retries gt SNMP trap inform retransmited times 0 255 default Show SNMP trap inform retry times Default Setting 5 Example Set SNMP trap inform retry times in 10 IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap inform retry times 10 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID Description Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap security engine ID probe disable Disable SNMP trap security engine ID probe default Show SNMP trap security engine ID probe mode 400 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap probe security engine id disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID Description Set or show SNMP trap security engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Example Set the SNMP trap security engine ID IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap security engine id 800007e5017f000011 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Name Description Set or show SNMP trap security name Syntax Secur
34. The page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Configuration Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If system cannot obtain the stateless address in time the configured IPv6 settings will be used The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 57 User s Manual of IG
35. VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_rv 1 Default Value 2 1 255 Robustness Variable default Show IPMC Interface Robustness Variable IPMC Parameter QI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qi Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qdi 1 Default Value 125 1 31744 Query Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Interval 528 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IPMC Parameter QRI Description Set or show the IPMC Query Response Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter QRI mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_qri Parameters mlid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_qri 1 Default Value 100 0 31744 Query Response Interval in tenths of seconds default Show IPMC Interface Query Response Interval IPMC Parameter LLQI Description Set or show the IPMC Last Listener Query Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter LLQI mldligmp lt vid gt ip mc_param_Ilqi Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_llgi 1 Default Value 10 0 31744 Last Listener Query Interval in tenths of
36. a Port Limit Control a Access Management a Access Management Siatistics a HTTPs a SSH a Port Security Status E Port Security Detail E DHCP Snooping E DHCP Snooping Statistics E IP Source Guard Configuration a IP Source Guard Static Table E ARP Inspection E ARP Inspection Static Table 4 12 1 Port Limit Control This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four different actions as described below The Limit Control module utilizes a lower layer module Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learnt on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Port Limit Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears 274 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Port Security Limit Control Configuration System Configuration Disabled E seconds Port Configuration mode umt acon State Re open oO ON ONA WH lt All gt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled a Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
37. default Show current limit 415 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting 4 Example Set limit in 5 IGS 10020MT gt security network limit limit 1 10 5 Security Network Limit Action Description Set or show the action involved with exceeding the limit Syntax Security Network Limit Action lt port_list gt none trap shut trap_shut Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports none trap shut trap_shut Action to be taken in case the number of MAC addresses exceeds the limit none Don t do anything trap Send an SNMP trap shut Shutdown the port trap_shut Send an SNMP trap and shutdown the port default Show current action Default Setting none Example Set trap mode for limit action for port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network limit action 1 trap Security Network Limit Reopen Description Reopen one or more ports whose limit is exceeded and shut down 416 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax Security Network Limit Reopen lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Reopen port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network limit reopen 1 Security Network NAS Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Security Network NAS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show 802
38. is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 63 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 7 UPnP Configure UPnP on this page UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components The UPnP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 9 appears UPnP Configuration TT Advertising Duration Figure 4 2 9 UPnP Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled e TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how
39. lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL protocol based VLAN entries Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Conf 6 25 SMTP Command SMTP Configuration Description Show SMTP configure Syntax SMTP Configuration Default Setting disable SMTP Mode Description Enable or disable SMTP configure 534 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax SMTP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP mode disable Disable SMTP mode default Show SMTP mode Default Setting disable SMTP Server Description Set or show SMTP server configure Syntax SMTP Server lt server gt lt port gt Parameters lt server gt SMTP server address lt port gt SMTP server port Default Setting disable SMTP Auth Description Enable or disable SMTP authentication configure Syntax SMTP Auth enable disable Parameters enable Enable SMTP Authentication disable Disable SMTP Authentication default Show SMTP Authentication 535 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable SMTP Auth_user Description Set or show SMTP authentication user name configure Syntax SMTP Auth_user lt auth_user_text gt Parameters lt auth_user_text gt SMTP Authentication User Name Default Setting disable SMTP Auth_pass Description Set or show SMTP a
40. lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps IGS 10020MT gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 QoS QCL Status Description Show QCL status This can be used to display if there is any conflict in QCE for differnet user types Syntax QoS QCL status combined static voice_vlan conflicts 499 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters combined static voice_vlan conflicts combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status voice_vlan Shows the status by Voice VLAN conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status QoS QCL Refresh Description Resolve QCE conflict status Same H W resource is shared by multiple applications and it may not be available even before MAX QCE entry So user can release the resource in use by other applications and use this command to acquire the resource Syntax QoS QCL refresh Parameters combined static voice_vlan conflicts combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status voice_vlan Shows the status by Voice VLAN conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps IGS 10020MT gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 500 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 16 Mirror Command Mirror Configu
41. sere 49 Figure 4 11 7 Authentication Server Configuration Page Screenshot 254 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Port State These setting are common for all of the Authentication Servers Object Description e Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one ro
42. 0 3 4 7 or Any 203 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list O Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 204 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 14 appears QCE Configuration Port Members ENEE EME AAA AA EA Key Parameters Action Parameters oe Default v v ESO ESTA DEL SMAC DMAC Type Frame Type Figure 4 9 14 QCE Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members Check the checkbox b
43. 4 4 1 Port ComfigUr Oria dae deere ala naar iisas 98 4 42 Port StatlStiCS OVEIVIS Wi teta dd 100 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 4 3 Port Thermal Protection ici rica 101 4 4 4 Port Thermal Protection Status s iiini e a circa 102 44 5 Port Statistics Detail 103 A O tesa snactes 105 AAPO MITO a E aid 106 4 5 Link Aggregation 2a 00 idas 108 4 51 Static Aggregation si nonini aserre ea a aa a ee aea ddvde aaiae aiai eE 111 45 2 LACP ConfiguratiON iesene enneren oie rada Siaina eies 113 45 3 N E System Status E E AE A E E ATE E AAA 114 4 5 4LACP Port Status aie as 115 4 5 SILAGP Port Statistics e Gs eB o E ES 116 460 VEAN ica is A EEEE A a E E A 117 4 6 1 VLAN OVES Wi noniin ii opinn ien e iaa eds 117 4 0 2 EEE 802 10 VELAN den ee iinne aeee aeoea ai ea eaaa aE obs cen rl 118 4 0 3 VEAN Basic Information a i a tai 121 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration iiie ieii i i tie aii e ieii 122 4 6 5 VLAN Memberlist care 126 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status iiisicain ii Dade Deedes e ai bales 127 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status tata 129 4 6 8 Private VLAN acres aie eee eee hee a a heen heehee 130 4 6 9 Port Isolation A li 132 4 6 10 VLAN Setting example is coooroitocresirnas reta e erre leer cas rada EnA iaa Eai 133 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 10 VLAN i ipoteze pesii isee iaee reis 134 4 6 10 2 VLAN Trunking between two 802 10 aware Switch ooooocccncocccnnocccccnnoncnnnonnncnnnonnnc nano cnn rro nn nnnnnn rra 137 4 6 10 3 Port SOlate 0 did 13
44. 491 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Map lt port_list gt lt class_list gt lt dpl_list gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class_list gt QoS class list or all default All QoS classes 0 7 lt dpl_list gt DP level list or all default All DP levels 0 1 lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 QoS Port DSCP Translation Description Set or show DSCP ingress translation mode If translation is enabled for a port incoming frame DSCP value is translated and translated value is used for QoS classification Syntax QoS Port DSCP Translation lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP ingress translation disable Disable DSCP ingress translation default Show DSCP ingress translation mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DSCP ingress translation on all port IGS 10020MT gt qos Port DSCP Translation 1 10 enable 492 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port DSCP Classification Description Set or show DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level This enables per port to map new DSCP value based on QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS Port DSCP Classification lt port_list gt none zero selected all Parameters lt port_list g
45. 6 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled y Disabled bd 7 0 Disablec Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled y 8 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled y 9 0 Disablec Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled y 10 0 Disablec Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled gt Disabled x Reset Refresh Clear Figure 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Page Screenshot 226 The page includes the following fields User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 e Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit All means all ports will have one specific setting e Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting e EVC Policer Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting e EVC Policer ID Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 128 e Port Redirect Select which port f
46. All ports Example Show MAC address learned on port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network psec port 1 MAC Address VID State Added Age Hold Time Security Network Limit Configuration Description Show Limit Control configuration Syntax Security Network Limit Configuration lt port_list gt 412 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Limit Control configuration IGS 10020MT gt security network limit configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration Disabled Disabled Action Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled hb A FF FF F A FP FSF SF RA Security Network Limit Mode Description Set or show global enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable port security disable Globally disable port security default Show current global enabledness of port security limit control 413 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable Example Enable the limit mode IGS 10020MT gt security network limit mode enable Security Network Limit Aging Description Set or show aging enabledness Syntax Security Network Limit Aging enable disable Parameters enable Enable aging disable Disable aging default Show current enabledness of aging
47. Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Buttons Save Click to save changes Authentication Server and the switch Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 256 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 7 RADIUS Overview This page provides an overview of the status of the RADIUS servers configurable on the Authentication configuration page The RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview Te adres 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1612 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable 0 0 0 0 1812 Disable RADIUS Accounting Server Status Overview ie adres 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0
48. Description Set or show the STP Bridge Transmit Hold Count parameter Syntax STP Txhold lt holdcount gt Parameters lt holdcount gt STP Transmit Hold Count 1 10 Default Setting 6 Example Set STP Tx hold in 10 IGS 10020MT gt stp txhold 10 STP MaxHops Description Set or show the MSTP Bridge Max Hop Count parameter Syntax STP MaxHops lt maxhops gt Parameters lt maxhops gt STP BPDU MaxHops 6 40 447 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting 20 Example Set STP maximum hops in 25 IGS 10020MT gt stp maxhops 25 STP MaxAge Description Set or show the bridge instance maximum age Syntax STP MaxAge lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt STP maximum age time 6 40 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 20 Example Set STP maximum age time in 10 IGS 10020MT gt stp maxage 10 STP FwdDelay Description Set or show the CIST MSTI bridge forward delay Syntax STP FwdDelay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt MSTP forward delay 4 30 and max_age lt forward_delay 1 2 Default Setting 15 448 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set STP forward delay value in 25 IGS 10020MT gt stp fwddelay 25 STP CName Description Set or Show MSTP configuration name and revision Syntax STP CName lt config name gt lt integer gt Parameters lt config name gt MSTP Conf
49. Description Show current CPU load 100ms 1s and 10s running average in percent zero is idle Syntax System Load Example To show current CPU load IGS 10020MT gt system load Load average 100ms 1s 10s 1 1 6 2 IP Command IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration IGS 10020MT gt ip configuration IP Configuration Disabled 192 168 0 101 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 253 0 0 0 0 347 sa Disabled IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 192 168 0 100 96 IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enable disable Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Disable DHCP sever User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt ip dhcp disable IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt 348 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100
50. H Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is get from the SFP module Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 105 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 4 7 Port Mirror Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirroring UP Link O XA Az Source Port 2 Y Target Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 7 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring 106 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT
51. If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry 293 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Add New Static Entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to pre
52. Location e MAC Address The MAC Address of this Industrial Managed Switch e Power The Power 1 and Power 2 ON OFF Status display e System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any e System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational e Software Version The software version of the Industrial Managed Switch e Software Date The date when the switch software was produced Buttons Auto refresh E Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page 55 4 2 2 IP Configuration User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DHCP Client O IP Address 192 163 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 1 K DNS Server 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 IP DNS Proxy Configuration N Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration Page Screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description e DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP server does not respond around 35 sec
53. MAG Learning iiss aare Wi ee ee ee ee ee es 364 MAC DUMPiurn hated ia ie eat rE e sedate he Ata a eat a ate SE 365 MAC St t StS urinaria tds diera dr 365 MAGC FlUS ci Race acia ateo rio cade the cai end atados cedido eo neo do ee cnt Se ad een dd aa oe 366 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command cnmmciccccconninncnrrr rr 367 VLAN Configura ais 367 ULA PUDO o do 367 VEAN Frame Ty Pe unica at 368 MLANGINGreSS E A E ces es escet tna road 369 VLAN Mode nnne n ann pe eye elise Se eel aia ey iene ain 369 VEAN Ek Pe a e ee ood bat eg eed do need de 370 VEAN QNO MOG coord tadas ltd 370 VEAN Ethernet Type 2 A estes is 371 MAN Adi its 371 VEAN Forbidden Add e e e e e ae A 372 VEAN Delete nostros sees eau e caleta ce serra sele es e nd 372 VLAN Forbidden Delete tado 373 VLAN Forbidden LookUp 000 Ass 373 VEAN LOOKUP o EE EE E e eh ed on Ae ee een Red abe 374 VLAN Name Add ica aranceles 374 VLAN Name Deleted riren t A A A a tad 375 VLAN Name Lookup e 375 LAN SAUS A e o e A 376 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command ccseceeeeeeeeeeeesneeeneeeeeeeeeesnaaeeneeeeseaeeeseaesaseeeeneeeeseeesaseaeeaseeees 377 PVLAN Configuration iostitaiioa iia 377 PLAN Addis datada opa E tdt 378 PVIEAN Delete tn 0 ateo cata dd ee ca Nando Dd al de ae EDO a celo Ne A A a tl 378 PVLAN LOOKUP A aaa A 379 PVLAN Isolate cio indi 379 6 7 Sec rity COMMA ING iseinean a inte 380 Security Switch User Configuration ceiciiidaian iodo odia adi 380 securit
54. Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt List of queues to configure as urgent queues 1 8 or none Default Setting none 478 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 14 Thermal Command Thermal Priority Temperature Description Set or show the temperature at which the ports shall be shut down Syntax Thermal prio_temp lt prio_list gt lt shut_down_temp gt Parameters lt prio_list gt List of priorities 0 3 lt shut_down_temp gt Temperature at which ports shall be shut down 0 255 degree C Example Show thermal priority temperature IGS 10020MT gt Thermal prio_temp Thermal Port Priority Description Set or show the ports priority Syntax Thermal port_prio lt port_list gt lt prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt prio gt Priority 0 3 Default Setting 0 479 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set thermal port priority in 2 Thermal Status Description Shows the chip temperature Syntax Thermal status Example Shows the chip temperature Thermal Configuration Description Show thermal_protect configuration Syntax Thermal configuration 480 6 15 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports
55. Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Description Object e Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion e Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors e Rx Undersize The number of short frames received with valid CRC e Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC e Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Jabber The number of long frames received with invalid CRC e Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port gA 1 Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes 2 Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Note Transmit Error Counters Description Object e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll Buttons Refresh The number of frames dropped due to excessi
56. You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Industrial Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location the Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later gt PLANET ee dr 1C5 10020MT Welcome to PLANET IGS 10020MT 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP Industrial Ethernet Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10H No 96 Mirnguan Rd Xmdian Dist Mew laps City 241 larwan KR O C lel YGL 2 2219 95168 Pex BBo 2 2219 3528 Email apre Suri by Cap LARET Ter Capac ds coconut Figure 3 4 Web Main Screen of Industrial Managed Switch 45 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 3 5 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Industrial Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the Industrial Managed Switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Industrial Managed Switch are
57. are allowed 207 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Buttons ni 3 Select the QCL status from this drop down list Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry incase conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 208 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT
58. ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeensneeeeeeeesnaaeeasneeeeeeeeseaeseseaeeneeeeseeeeesnaesnseeneees 33 2 21 Installation Steps da 33 2 2 2DIN Y MOUNTING cc ita 34 2 2 3 Wall Mount Plate MountiNg 00ii a a ee ave a bbs 36 2 3 Wiring the Power puts iaa 37 2 4 Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact aiii 37 rs Ann ce E eis cu eduudesedweseedenssledscedesttes 38 2 5 1 Installing the SFP EA 39 2 5 2 Remove the Module cnc ai ssiaen a eT i tee eta 41 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT cnica aaa 42 A AAA a Sa Aiaa aaa a A aai ia Tiea A A 42 3 2 Management Access OvVerVie Wenn 43 3 3 Remote Telnet c ecccceseeeceeeseeeeeensneeeeensneeeeenseeeeeensneeeeensneeeeenseeeseeenaneeeeenseeeeeenaneeeeenaeeeeeeaseeeeeenseeeeenseeeenenses 44 3 4 Web Manage Me dando 45 3 5 SNMP Based Network ManageMent oomnnccniconnnnnncccnnncncnr rr 46 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility ooooonnnccononinninncccnnncccnrccrrcrc cr 47 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 WEB CONFIGURATION cocoa nueduaics tasecusisanvsanssntusaaalsanasaadsntunanssunetanuactusanvsaiesens 49 BL Main Web Page iiiccies scence eee st cede ck ncaa shcte cece Yeeete E ae funees setbecccedsducesacucetecedeaselessiverteacecnes 52 AD SY SUC T E AEE E r O 54 4 2 System Information aane A A ede ie tata 55 42 2 P Config ratioi isean sinh A A A in oda 56 4 2 3 1PvO COnfIgUr ati eimoirita tada alcaide 57 4 2 A Users CONNGUIATION ri A A ld 58 UL Privilege Level coi ae 61 4 2 6 NTP Configuration d
59. containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 10 1 Access Control List Status This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 10 1 appears ACL Status User Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Mir
60. e Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Forced join to Voice VLAN All means all ports will have one specific setting e Port Security Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save e Port Discovery Protocol Click to save changes Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP All means all ports will have one specific setting Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to
61. e Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to 333 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lack of resources e Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Butt
62. for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain 547 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format
63. include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses Rx Bad radiusAuthClientExtB The number of RADIUS Authenticators adAuthenticators Access Response packets containing invalid authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes 260 Tx Tx Tx Tx Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access Requests Access Retransmissio ns Pending Requests Timeouts User s Manual of IGS 10020MT radiusAuthClientExtU nknownTypes radiusAuthClientExtP acketsDropped radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRequests radiusAuthClientExtA ccessRetransmission S radiusAuthClientExtP endingRequests radiusAuthClientExtT imeouts received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS Access Request packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS Access Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when an Access Request is sent
64. it shall show this information 127 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT for all the VLAN Users and this is the default VLAN membership allows the frames Classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded to the respective VLAN member ports e VLAN User AVLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only ona single multicast VLAN Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Buttons z ZI Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh i Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table e the entry with the lo
65. paste et estes E escandalo lbn bude uss 454 SAP Port AUTO ERG a 455 STP Pont PZP aena an R isa cats 455 STP PortRestrictedRole inoin en e E a a a e e E aada 456 STA Port Restricted Tessie iaa a aaa e a Denes aae aa a aaa iea aat dia 456 STP Port bpduGuard sz hostel a A Aa 457 STP Pom Statisti Cnoi ie ocala ee etait es Selves ta and adds de sue tind ae a di als dee edali tes ii a 457 STP Porm MCh Ck ci o eat 458 STP MSTI Port Configuration is 458 STP MSTI Port Cost 2 een ee hs ee Riad 459 STP MSTI Port Priority iia 459 6 9 Link Aggregation Command mnncccccnnnnncccnnn cc 460 Aggregation Configuration sincs do i EAEE S 460 Aggregation Add seese eine eeaeee lada sail 460 Aggregation Delete oia A ETEA EE A E A A T 460 Aggregation Lookup insiet ine aiae iiiad eaa aaa TE ae iiaae Eea L aa aiaa TE ETE a Ta E 461 Aggregation Mode cio oidos 461 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command ssssssnssenssennsennnennnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunnan anneanne 462 LACP Configuration ainei e ia ii 462 LACP MOCO EE E E E iaa 463 PAG a AEN x nh vet dees da Srl E ET ET TE A E AAT 463 LACP Xo ee eee 464 LACA eS a oR e eee 464 LACP Statistics 465 6 11 LLDP COMO isnaad eaa aeaa raaa aaao a ra ae denada aaa aeaa aet eaat Eadie aeaaaee ai 466 LEDP Configurations cfectscccenass2c248 Cec caa tess cheese aes cate ete docs au E AEAE hc dtnctcsbecuate cabessecteates 466 LDP Modest A a 466 LELDP Optional TVS a e eel een de do a e eed
66. s Manual of IGS 10020MT Step 3 Check the DIN Rail is tightly on the track y Please refer to following procedures to remove the Industrial Managed Switch from the track Step 4 Lightly press the button of DIN Rail for remove it from the track r MN AA 35 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 2 3 Wall Mount Plate Mounting To install the Industrial Managed Switch on the wall Please follow the instructions below Step 1 Remove the DIN Rail from the Industrial Managed Switch Use the screwdriver to loose the screws and remove the DIN Rail Step 2 Place the wall mount plate on the rear panel of the Industrial Managed Switch Step 3 Use the screwdriver to screw the wall mount plate on the Industrial Managed Switch Step 4 Use the hook holes at the corners of the wall mount plate to hang the Industrial Managed Switch on the wall Step 5 To remove the wall mount plate reverse steps above 36 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 3 Wiring the Power Inputs The 6 contacts terminal block connector on the top panel of Industrial Managed Switch is used for two DC redundant power inputs Please follow the steps to insert the power wire The PWR1 is 1 8 2 and PWR2 is 5 amp 6 contact Remember Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosing 1 2 3 4 5 6 Power 1 Fault Power 2 Figure 2 4 6 Contacts of Terminal Block Connector 1 The wire gauge for the terminal b
67. s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping screen in Figure 4 15 2 appears ICMPv6 Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Length 56 Ping Count Ping Interval Figure 4 15 2 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Description Object e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval Button The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Start Click to start transmitting ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with PING 319 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues on special port After you press Test 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are rece
68. to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 3COM 3C940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP PEAP MD5 Challenge Protected EAP PEAP Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate as computer when computer information is available C Authenticate as guest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 11 19 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue 272 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT i Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password for the network Figure 4 11 20 Windows Client Popup Login Request Message 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Local Area Connection 3 User name test Password co o o Logon domain Figure 4 11 21 273 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 Security This section is to control the access of the Industrial Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics
69. 5 y 5 x rela aeaaee la so 998 aaa aa Figure 4 2 7 Privilege Levels Configuration Page Screenshot 61 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriP HY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI e Privilege Level Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group Buttons Save Click to save changes
70. 7 7 appears MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration z lt All gt CIST 32768 MSTI1 32768 MSTI2 32768 MSTI3 32768 MSTI4 32768 MSTI5 32768 MSTI6 32768 MSTI7 32768 Reset Figure 4 7 7 MSTI Priority Page Screenshot EJE IEE i EN The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active e Priority The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier means all MSTI items will have one priority setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 158 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears MSTI Configuration Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Name 00 30 4f 10 02 00 MSTI Mapping MSTI LANs Mapped Figure 4 7 8 MSTI Configuration Page Screenshot
71. Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID Example Add port 1 4 in Group1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt aggr add 1 4 1 Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation 460 Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID Example Delete Group2 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt aggr delete 2 Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmac lip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution 461 Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt Aggr mode smac disable 6 10 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Command LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configur
72. Added 0 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbors Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out 0 LLDP local counters Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx TLV RxTLV RxTLV Port Frames Frames Errors DiscardsErrors Unknown Organz LLDP Info Description Show LLDP neighbor device information 470 Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 6 12 LLDPMED Command LLDPMED Configuration Description Show LLDP MED configuration Syntax LLDPMED Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP MED configuration of port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt IIdpmed configuration 1 4 LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeast Count 4 Location Coordinates Latitude 0 0000 North Longitude 0 0000 East Altitude 0 0000 meter s Map datum WGS84 Civic Address Location Policies none none none none 471 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT LLDPMED Civic Description Set or show LLDP MED Civic Address Location Syntax LLDPMED Civic User s Manual of IGS 10020MT country state county city district block street leading_street_direction trailing_street_suffix str_suf house_no house_no_s uffix landmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_com_name p_o box additional_code lt civic_value gt Paramete
73. DEI list or all default All DEIs 0 1 lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 QoS Port Classification DSCP Description Set or show if the classification is based on DSCP value in IP frames Syntax QoS Port Classification DSCP lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable DSCP based classification disable Disable DSCP based classification default Show DSCP based classification mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port classification DSCP IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Classification dscp 1 10 enable 484 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port Policer Mode Description Set or show the port policer mode Syntax QoS Port Policer Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port policer disable Disable port policer default Show port policer mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port policer IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Policer Mode 1 10 enable QoS Port Policer Rate Description Set or show the port policer rate Syntax QoS Port Policer Rate lt port_list gt lt rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt rate gt Rate in kbps or fps 100 15000000 Default Setting 500 Example Set the port policer rat
74. DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values 195 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for a specific port are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking sscreen in Figure 4 9 8 appears Pot vw QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Figure 4 9 8 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e PCP DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default e QoS class DP level Controls the mapping of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values to PCP DEI Mapping when the mode is set to Mapped Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 196 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 7 Port DSCP This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports The Port DSCP screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears QoS Port DSCP Configuration lt All gt
75. Delete VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet l protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Eth2 lt ether_type gt arpliplipxlat 532 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF lt pid gt PID value Ox0 OxFFFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 0xF FFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete LLC Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Delete Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 OxFF VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Add lt port_list gt lt group_id gt lt vid gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt group_id gt Protocol group ID lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 533 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL protocol based VLAN group to VLAN mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Vlan Delete lt port_list gt lt group_id gt Parameters
76. Description Set or show ARP inspection mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable ARP Inspection disable Disable ARP Inspection Default Setting disable Example Enable ARP inspection mode IGS 10020MT gt security network arp inspection mode enable 439 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode Description Set or show the ARP Inspection port mode Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable ARP Inspection port disable Disable ARP Inspection port default Show ARP Inspection port mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable the ARP inspection mode of port 1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt security network arp inspection port mode 1 Security Network ARP Inspection Entry Description Add or delete ARP inspection static entry Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_mac gt lt allowed_ip gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port ARP inspection static entry delete Delete existing port ARP inspection static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_mac gt MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC address allowed for doing ARP request lt allowed_ip gt IP add
77. Description Set or show the port link up and link down trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap link up and link down disable Disable SNMP trap link up and link down default Show SNMP trap link up and link down mode 398 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap link up IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap link up disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap inform disable Disable SNMP trap inform default Show SNMP inform mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap inform mode IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap inform mode disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform timeout usecs Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Timeout lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt SNMP trap inform timeout 0 2147 seconds default Show SNMP trap inform timeout 399 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap inform timeout in 20sec IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap inform timeout 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry Times Description Set or show the SNMP trap inform retry times
78. Event table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table table screen in Figure 4 17 6 appears RMON Event Overview Auto refresh C Start from Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page Event tee LogIndex LogDescription No more entries Figure 4 17 6 RMON Event Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Auto refresh H Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 330 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 17 7 RMON History Configuration Configure RMON History table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 7 appears RMON History Configuration Buckets Delete 10 Data Source interva
79. Example Show the port 1 security state IGS 10020MT gt security network nas state 1 Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Security Network NAS Reauthentication Description Set or show Reauthentication enabledness Syntax Security Network NAS Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show current reauthentication mode Default Setting disable Example Enable reauthentication function IGS 10020MT gt security network nas reauthentication enable 419 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Network NAS ReauthPeriod Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN IGS 10020MT gt security network nas radius_vlan enable Securi
80. IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID 21 Example Set IP address IGS 10020MT gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 IP Ping Description Ping IP address ICMP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr_string gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example IGS 10020MT gt ip ping 192 168 0 21 PING server 192 168 0 21 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 3 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 21 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 349 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IP DNS Description Set or show the DNS server address Syntax IP DNS lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Showdne IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set DNS IP address IGS 10020MT gt ip dns 168 95 1 1 IP DNS Proxy Description Set or show the IP DNS Proxy mode Syntax IP DNS_Proxy enable disable Parameters enable Enable DNS Proxy disable Disable DNS Proxy Default Setting disable Example Enable DNS proxy function IGS 10020MT gt ip dns_proxy enable 350 User s Manual of IGS 10
81. LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Syntax LLDPMED Fast lt count gt Parameters lt count gt The number of times the fast start LLDPDU are being sent during the activation of the fast start mechanism defined by LLDP MED 1 10 LLDPMED Info Description Show LLDP MED neighbor device information Syntax LLDPMED Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 476 6 13 EEE Command EEE Configuration Description Show eee configuration Syntax EEE Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show EEE configuration of port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt eee configuration 1 4 EEE Configuration Port Mode Urgent queues Disabled none Disabled none Disabled none Disabled none EEE Mode Description Set or show the eee mode Syntax EEE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable EEE 477 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT disable Disable EEE default Show eee mode Default Setting Disabled Example Enable EEE mode for port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt eee mode enable 1 4 EEE Urgent Queues Description Set or show EEE Urgent queues Syntax EEE Urgent_queues lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt
82. MLD respectively Queries Received e IGMP MLD The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD respectively Queries Transmitted e IGMPv1 Joins The number of Received IGMPv1 Joins Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 The number of Received IGMPv2 Joins and MLDv1 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv3 MLDv2 The number of Received IGMPv3 Joins and MLDv2 Reports respectively Reports Received e IGMPv2 MLDv1 Leaves The number of Received IGMPv2 Leaves and MLDv1 Dones respectively Received Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate _ clear J Clears MVR Statistics counters 185 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 16 MVR Groups Information Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MVR Group Table The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 19 appears MVR Channels Groups Information Auto refresh E Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1
83. Ma Mi Ma Add New Private VLAN Reset Figure 4 6 6 Private VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members VLAN A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Click to add new VLAN Click to save changes Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 131 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 9 Port Isolation Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with th
84. Manual of IGS 10020MT TKIP is an acronym for Temporal Key Integrity Protocol It used in WPA to replace WEP with a new encryption algorithm TKIP comprises the same encryption engine and RC4 algorithm defined for WEP The key used for encryption in TKIP is 128 bits and changes the key used for each packet UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP
85. N A v aiii iea 483 QoS Port Classification Tag eiii a eaa a Tara EEE aA a a EEE E S Ee AEE AAE E AA AE RS Eha 483 QoS Port Classification Maps cs 484 QoS Port Classification DS OP a a E er Sr ee a cnn a cnn nan a naar rre 484 QoS Port Polic r Mode iii E ee lee 485 QoS Port Policer Rate cui it Bede cocida 485 QoS Port Policer Unitaria ias reido atrial 486 QOS Port Scheduler Mode cicle R 486 15 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port Scheduler Weight ico esse a iia eo ia ee deecsueedeneetdacduscidesduesteedeegieedsncedeedtaees 487 QoS Port QueueShaper Mode 0 c ceecceceeeeeneeceeeeeeececeeeeeaaeceaeeseaaecaeeeeaaecaeeeeaaesaeeseaaesseeeseaaessaeeseaaesseeeeaeenaees 487 QoS Port QuevieShaper Rate iii dias 488 QoS Port QueueShaper EXCESS ia errorea ena eer EEA EE a aa EA ERa rA OAA ORAE Arna ARAA EEEa AA Eara 488 QoS Port Shaper Mode iii eee se ied T ie cde ne ei 489 QoS Port Shaper Rates E E aii dea eects 489 QoS Port TagRemarking Mode scccscccsdssteevesactenaesaiepheste tte 490 QoS Port Tagremarking POP mita Aa 490 QoS Port TagRemarking DEI cuco ei teen tee a shee de ecee site cen eie cee de ae E a aaia aet 491 QoS Port TagRemarking Map cooimiioniiii aan 491 GoS PortDSCP Translation iii dais 492 QoS Port DSCP CaS fA OT E e a a n no norr rn nn E a rre rn rre rr 493 Qos Port DSCP EgressRemark is s 493 DOS DSGP IE e E EE A doo dl isos Goin Ue lode Seth aati Mia ead 494 QOS DSCP Translat oda dat adapta ge
86. Rx Invalid Length Port 1 Backend Server Statistics Rx Access Challenges O Tx Responses Rx Other Requests Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures Security Network ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax Security Network ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Security Network ACL Action Description Set or show the ACL port default action Syntax Security Network ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt 425 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Example Show ACL action in port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network acl action 1 Port Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Mirror Logging Shutdown Counter Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 Security Network ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax Security Network ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or a
87. SNMP protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Version 1 2c 3 393 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP version Default Setting 2c Example Set SNMP in version 3 IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp version 3 Security Switch SNMP Read Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP read access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Read Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP read community Default Setting public Example Set SNMP read community private IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp read community private 394 Security Switch SNMP Write Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP write access Syntax Security Switch SNMP Write Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP write community Default Setting private Example Set public value in SNMP write community User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp write community public Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode Description Set or show the SNMP trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP traps disable Disable SNMP tr
88. SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 96 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new acc
89. Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Security Network ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax Security Network ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 Example Delete ACE 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network acl delete 1 Security Network ACL Lookup Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax Security Network ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 Example Lookup ACE 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network acl lookup 1 429 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Network ACL Clear Description Clear all ACL counters Syntax Security Network ACL Clear Example Clear all ACL counters IGS 10020MT gt security network acl clear Security Network ACL Status Description Show ACL status Syntax Security Network ACL Status combined static dhcp upnp arp_inspection ipmc ip_source_guard conflicts Parameters combined Shows the combined status static Shows the static user configured status dhcp Shows the status by DHCP upnp Shows the status by UPnP arp_inspection Shows the status by ARP Inspection ip_source_guard Shows the status by IP Source Guard conflicts Shows all conflict status default Shows the combined status Example Show ACL status IGS 10020MT gt security network acl status Security Network DHCP Relay Configuration Description Show DHCP relay configuration
90. The Industrial Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced 123 VLAN Port Configuration User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears VLAN Port Configuration Mode EEE 202 10 vw Ingress Acceptable Set out layer LAN port PVID Frame rie Link Type Q in Q Mode tag ether ether type 1 PA PA PA PA E 1 PA PA PA z O
91. Value STP disabled for all ports 128 0 32 768 149 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge Es The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will r Note occu Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving fr
92. Voice VLAN all Shows all VLANs configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration Example Show VLAN status IGS 10020MT gt vlan lookup VID VLAN Name default VLAN Name Add Description Add VLAN Name to a VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Add lt name gt lt vid gt 374 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add VLAN name for VLAN 1 IGS 10020MT gt vlan name add test 1 VLAN Name Delete Description Delete VLAN Name to VLAN ID Mapping Syntax VLAN Name Delete lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet Example Delete VLAN name IGS 10020MT gt vlan name delete test VLAN Name Lookup Description Show VLAN Name table Syntax VLAN Name Lookup lt name gt Parameters lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet 375 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example To show VLAN Name table IGS 10020MT gt vlan name lookup VLAN Status Description VLAN Port Configuration Status Syntax VLAN Status lt port_list gt co
93. When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value e DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears e DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination VLAN Parameters Object MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description e 802 10 Tagged Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802 1Q tagged The allowed values are Any Any value is allowed don t care Enabled Tagged frame only Disabled Untagged frame only The default value is Any e VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears e VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range
94. all ACEs 217 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here The ACE Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears ACE Configuration Ai x Action Permit x Any gt Disabled x Any _ EVC Policer Disabled v Disabled y Disabled Mirror Logging Disabled Shutdown Disabled 0 VLAN Parameters Any El VLAN ID Filter Any E Tag Priority Any Save Reset Cancel Figure 4 10 3 ACE Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies All The ACE applies to all port Porta The ACE applies to this port number where nis the number of the switch port e Policy Filter Specify the policy number filter for this ACE Any No policy filter is specified policy filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE choose this value Two field for entering an policy value and bitmask appears 218 e Po
95. and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a 261 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name Description IP Address IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question State Round Trip Time radiusAuthClient ExtRoundTripTim e 262 Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server i
96. and Group Address with 20 entries per page Port Members No more entries ror tember 7 can 10 crowns a 5 6 7 8 9 ao no more mires Figure 4 8 19 MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refiesh Click to refresh the page immediate Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels Groups Information Table gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 186 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 17 MVR SFM Information Entries in the MVR SFM Information Table are shown on this page The MVR SFM Source Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry The MVR Groups Information screen in Figure 4 8 20 appears MVR SFM Information Auto refresh C Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and Group Address with 20 entries per page No more entries VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Hardware
97. are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels e Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type e QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s e Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 188 4 9 2 Port Policing User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page allows you to configure the Policer settings for all switch ports The Port Policing screen in Figure 4 9 1 appears The page includes the following fields 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 QoS In
98. are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags 560 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider
99. aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both 308 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class l The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpo
100. be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 All means all ports will have one specific setting 155 e Priority User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 All means all ports will have one specific setting e operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status e Admin Edge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as beeing set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized All means all ports will have one specific setting e Auto Edge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not e Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it h
101. can save the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags You can load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Configuration active or alternate firmware on this page You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally 54 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears System Information Contact Name IGS 10020MT Location MAC Address 00 30 4f 00 a80 01 POWER1 ON Power POWER2 ON System Date 1970 01 01 Thu 01 22 19 00 00 System Uptime 0d 01 22 19 Software Version 1 0b120618 Software Date 2012 06 18T10 43 11 0800 Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact e Name The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name e Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System
102. clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 245 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 4 Network Access Overview This page provides an overview of the current NAS port states for the selected switch The Network Access Overview screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears Network Access Server Switch Status Admin State Port State Last ID QoS Class Port LAN ID Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized Force Authorized 2 3 4 5 6 fa 8 3 10 Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Globally Disabled Auto refresh C Figure 4 11 5 Network Access Server Switch Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual state
103. code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US e State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district e City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighborhood Neighborhood block e Street Street Example Poppelvej e Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N e Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW e Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location Additional location info Example South Wing info e Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn e Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 e Building Building structure Example Low Library e Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 e Floor Floor Example 4 e Room no Room number Example 450F 304 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community Postal community name Example Leonia name e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Exampl
104. community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w And it also allow a valid hostname A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 dot dash Spaces are not allowed the first character must be an alpha character and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash e Trap Destination IPv6 Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon 88 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e Trap Authentication Failure Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure e Trap Link up and Link down Indicates the SNMP trap link up and link down mode opera
105. created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet 554 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not
106. discarded on the port Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate cier J Click to clear the information immediately 164 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 Multicast 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The ro
107. discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters LLDP Port Configuration Optional TLVs lt All gt E T T Disabled y Al Disabled y A Disabled y al Disabled y Disabled x Disabled y Disabled y Disabled y Disabled y Disabled y al TEEN ISIS SS Bl 4
108. dynamic clients can be learned on given ports This value can be 0 1 2 and unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port 288 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons aes to saic Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table This page provides Static IP Source Guard Table The Static IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 12 11 appears Static IP Source Guard Table VLAN ID IP Address MAC address Add New Entry Save Reset Figure 4 12 11 Static IP Source Guard Table Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address e MAC address Allowed Source MAC address Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 289 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 12
109. e Startup The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value e Falling Index Falling event index 326 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 17 3 RMON Alarm Status This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table screen in Figure 4 17 3 appears Port Statistics Overview Auto refresh O Start from Control Index 0 with 20 entries per page i Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling No more entries Figure 4 17 3 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of
110. from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 Note special character and underscore _ are not allowed Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh i l Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 144 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 15 Protocol based VLAN Mambership This page allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch The Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table screen in Figure 4 6 21 appears Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Port Members Sie Delete Group Name vian 10 1 5 o r aJo zo lo No GGroupe
111. from 33 to 126 sha An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase des An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES privacy protocol privacy protocol should belong to The allowed string length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 user entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp user add 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 md5 12345678 des abcdefgh Security Switch SNMP User Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 user entry 404 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp user delete 1 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey Description Change SNMPv3 user password Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Changekey lt engineid gt lt user_name gt lt auth_password gt lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A stri
112. greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear e SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation e SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation e DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields tha
113. gt System version Version 1 0b120618 Build Date 2012 06 18T10 43 11 0800 IGS 10020MT gt System Log Server Mode Description Show or set the system log server mode Syntax System Log Server Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable system log server mode disable Disable system log server mode default Show system Log server mode 341 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable Example To show the log server mode IGS 10020MT gt System log server mode System Log Server Mode Disabled System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt clear Parameters lt name gt System name string 1 255 Use clear or to clear the string System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign clear Clear system name Example To set device title IGS 10020MT gt System name IGS 10020MT System Contact Description Set or show the system contact Syntax System Contact lt contact gt clear 342 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt contact gt System contact string 1 255 Use clear or to clear the string In CLI No blank or spa
114. is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets
115. is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value e Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care 220 ARP Parameters User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object Description ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear Sender IP Address When Host or Netwo
116. is for you to input the SMTP server port number As default is 25 e SMTP Authentication Enabled As usual SMTP server is denied to relay a mail from a different domain so you have to enable this option and input your mail account and password for SMTP sever authorizing to forward a mail from different domain For example you want a SMTP server which located on mail 123 com send a mail to mail 456 net com If you want to send the mail to a SMTP server which located on the same domain or the same SMTP server you don t have to enable SMTP authentication e Authentication User Name It is for you to input your mail account name e Authentication Password It is for you to input your mail account password e E mail From It is for you to input who send this mail e E mail Subject It is for you to input mail subject e E mail 1 To It is for you to input recipient mail address e E mail 2 To It is for you to input secondary recipient mail address 73 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Ce oy Click to test SMTP server address Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 74 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 15 EEE Power Reduction This page allows the user to configure the current EEE port settings EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization EEE w
117. is to simplify the process of connecting any home device to the wireless network Wikipedia WTR is an acronym for Wait To Restore This is the time a fail on a resource has to be not active before restoration back to this previously failing resource is done 562 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication EC Declaration of Conformi For the following equipment Type of Product IGS 10020MT Model Number Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch Produced by Manufacturers Name Planet Technology Corp Manufacturer s Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C is herewith confirmed to com ply with the requi rements set out in the Council Directive on the Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive on 2004 108 EC For the evaluation regarding the EMC the following standards were applied EN 55022 2010 Class A EN 55024 2010 IEC 61000 4 2 2008 IEC 61000 4 3 2006 A1 2007 A2 2010 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 A1 2010 IEC 61000 4 5 2005 IEC 61000 4 6 2008 IEC 61000 4 8 2009 Responsible for marking this declaration if the Manufacturer O Authorized representative established within the EU Authorized representative established within the EU if applicable Company Name Planet Technology Corp Company Address 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City
118. less than the falling threshold RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Rising Threshold Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Rising Index Rising event index 1 65535 Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Falling Index Falling event index 1 65535 325 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 2 RMON Alarm Detail This page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry screen in Figure 4 17 2 appears Detailed RMON Alarm ID Auto refresh O Interval undefined Variable SampleType Value Startup RisingThreshold Risingindex FallingThreshold Fallingindex 20200000000 Figure 4 17 2 Detailed RMON Alarm ID page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period
119. lt S S Alam o O O One relay output for power fail Alarm Relay current carry ability 1A DC 24V System Power 1 Green Power 2 Green Fault Alarm Green LED Indicator LNK ACT Green 1000 Orange LNK ACT Green 1000 Orange Weight e Layer 2 function Basic Management Interfaces Web Browser Remote Telnet SNMPv1 v2c Secure Management Interface SSH SSL SNMP v3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Flow Control disable enable Power saving mode control Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status reos TX RX Both Forumit oring Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups Q in Q tunneling Private VLAN Edge PVE MAC based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Voice VLAN MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Up to 255 VLAN groups out of 4095 VLAN IDs Link Adarsaation IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk ggreg Support 5 groups of 10 Port trunk support AS Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR Port configuration 26 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 8 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP TOS field in IP Packet a IGMP v1 v2 V3 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups IGMP Querier mode support MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 255 multicast Groups AEE nea MLD Querier mode su
120. lt All gt Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 4 9 9 QoS Port DSCP Configuration Page Screenshot m m A A o A z F O O ON DN ke UN The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings e Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress m Translate Classify e Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox means to select all ports of Industrial Managed Switch e Classify The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Classification for a port has 4 different values All means all ports will have one specific setting m Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is O Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP 197 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT m All Classify all DSCP e Egress The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Port Egress Rewri
121. made locally and revert to previously saved values 281 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 6 Port Security Status This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The Port Security Status screen in Figure 4 12 6 appears Port Security Switch Status User Module Legend User Module Name Limit Control 802 1X DHCP Snooping Voice VLAN Port Status MAC Count Count Port Users State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh J Figure 4 12 6 Port Security Status Screen Page Screenshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fa 8 3 10 The page includes the following fields User Module Legend The legend shows
122. modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized 239 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The
123. network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public Use the SNMP Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s SNMP function This section has the following items E System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page a System Information The system information is provides here a SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page a SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page 86 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT a SNM
124. normally Port link operating normally Port link operating normally Port link operating normally Port link operating normally Port link operating normally Port link operating normally 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Figure 4 4 4 Thermal Protection Status Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Local Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Temperature The current temperature for logical port e Port Status This function display port link operation status it depend on the Temperature Setting of Thermal Protection Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 102 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 4 5 Port Statistics Detail This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Port Statistics Detail screen in Figure 4 4 5 appears Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Pot1 Y Auto refresh C Refresh Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets Tx Packets Rx Octets Tx Octets Rx Unicast Tx Unicast Rx Multicast Tx Multicast Rx Broadcast Tx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Transmit Siz
125. of Industrial Managed Switch The Image Select screen in Figure 4 2 27 appears Software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version 1 0b120618 Date 2012 06 18T10 43 11 0800 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version 1 0b120611 Date 2012 06 11T17 27 45 0800 Activate Alternate Image Cancel Figure 4 2 27 Image Select Page Screenshot Button Activate Al DAS Click to choose Alternate Image as Activate Image Message from webpage j Are you sure you want to activate the alternate software image Figure 4 2 28 Image Select Page Screenshot System restart in progess The system is now restarting Waiting please stand by Figure 4 2 29 Image Select Page Screenshot 82 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT System restart in progess The system is now restarting ew Polling Figure 4 2 30 Image Select Page Screenshot System restart in progess The system is now restarting Y Completed Figure 4 2 31 Image Select Page Screenshot After the system reboot you can use the Alternate Image of Industrial Managed Switch 83 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 21 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the stack switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 2 32 appears Factory Defaults Are you sure you want
126. of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 258 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 8 RADIUS Details This page provides detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server The RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview screen in Figure 4 11 9 appears RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 Server 1 y Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts Access Requests Access Rejects Access Retransmissions Access Challenges Pending Requests Malformed Access Responses Timeouts Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped IP Address 0 0 0 0 1812 State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Ser
127. on this page The MLD SFM Souce Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLD SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD SSM Information Table The MLDv2 Information screen in Figure 4 8 16 appears MLD SFM Information Auto refresh Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and Group ff00 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Group Port Mode Source Address Hardware Filter Switch No more entries Figure 4 8 16 MLD SSM Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group address of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128
128. or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server TCP port Use 0 to use the default TACACS port 49 Example Set TACACS authentication server configuration IGS 10020MT gt security aaa tacacs 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 49 Security AAA Statistics Description Show RADIUS statistics Syntax Security AAA Statistics lt server_index gt 445 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show statistics for all servers Example Show RADIUS statistics IGS 10020MT gt security aaa statistics 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command STP Configuration Description Show STP configuration Syntax STP Configuration Example Show STP configuration IGS 10020MT gt stp cofiguration STP Configuration 20 715 Tx Hold Count 6 Max Hop Count 20 BPDU Filtering Disabled BPDU Guard Disabled Error Recovery Disabled STP Version Description Set or show the STP Bridge protocol version 446 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax STP Version lt stp_version gt Parameters lt stp_version gt mstp rstp stp Default Setting MSTP Example Set the STP Bridge protocol version IGS 10020MT gt stp version rstp STP Tx Hold
129. permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP Address User IP address of the entry Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 296 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by MAC address The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table screen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Start from Port vw VLAN 1 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address No more entries Auto refresh O Figure 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table The Start from port address VLAN IP address and IP mask input fields allo
130. port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality WEP is an acronym for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a deprecated algorithm to secure IEEE 802 11 wireless networks Wireless networks broadcast messages using radio so are more susceptible to eavesdropping than wired networks When introduced in 1999 WEP was intended to provide confidentiality comparable to that of a traditional wired network Wikipedia WiFi is an acronym for Wireless Fidelity It is meant to be used generically when referring of any type of 802 11 network whether 802 11b 802 11a dual band etc The term is promulgated by the Wi Fi Alliance WPA is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access lt was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous system Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 11 i standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA is specifically designed to also work with pre WPA wireless network interface cards through firmware upgrades but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points WPA2 implement
131. prevents IP spoofing attacks E Auto DoS rule to defend DoS attack a IP address access management to prevent unauthorized intruder gt Management m Switch Management Interfaces Web switch management Remote Telnet management SNMP v v2c and v3 switch management SSH SSL secure access Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events IPv6 IP Address NTP DNS management Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP DHCP Relay DHCP Option82 User Privilege levels control 24 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT NTP Network Time Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Protocol Cable Diagnostic technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues Reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default PLANET Smart Discovery Utility for deploy management 25 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 1 5 Product Specification Model Name IGS 10020MT Hardware Specification Copper Ports 8 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports aor 2 1000Base SX LX BX SFP interfaces Port 9 and Port 10 A pce Compatible with 100Base FX SFP Switch Architecture Store and Forward Switch Fabric 20 bps non blocking Throughput packet per second 14 8Mpps Flow Control IEEE 802 3 Pause Frame for Full Duplex Back pressure for Half Duplex Enclosure IP30 Aluminum Metal Case S
132. previously saved values 212 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process The Voice VLAN OUI Table screen in Figure 4 9 19 appears Voice VLAN OUI Table 00 30 4f PLANET phones 00 03 6b Cisco phones 00 0f e2 H3C phones 00 60 b9 Philips and NEC AG phones 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones 00 e0 75 Polycom phones 00 e0 bb 3Com phones 00 01 e3 Siemens AG phones Add New Entry Figure 4 9 19 Voice VLAN OUI Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI An telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description Buttons Add New Entry Save Click to save changes The description of OUI address Normaly it descript which vendor telephony device The allowed string length is 0 to 32 Click to add a new access management entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 213 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 10 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs
133. public IP Address NA A 192 168 0 100 siii dls PC Workstation z with SNMP application Internet AS IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 5 SNMP Management 46 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery Utility For easily list the Industrial Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user s manual CD ROM is an ideal solution The following install instructions guiding you for run the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 1 Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC 2 Run this utility and the following screen appears File Option Help O Refresh ax Exit __ MAC Address Device Name Version DevicelP___ NewPassword 1P Address Select Adapter 192 168 0 188 00 18 38 2E 40 44 I Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All Message Figure 3 6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose different LAN card by use the Select Adapter tool File Option Help O Refresh x Exit JAC Athos en IP Address 00 30 4F 00 40 01 IGS 10020MT 1 0b120618 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 PLANET IGS 10020MT Select Adapter 192 168 0 198 00 1B 39 2E A0 A4 I Control Packet Force Broadcast Sa Update Device Update Multi Update All Connect to Device Device IGS 1
134. removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 7 appears IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Filtering Groups Add New Filtering Group Reset Figure 4 8 7 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Buttons Add New Filtering Group Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 172 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 8 appears Auto refresh C Refresh Clear IGMP Snooping Status Statistics 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 bh The page includes the following fields Object Figure 4 8 8 IGMP Snooping Status Page Screenshot Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE
135. risk Figure 4 2 23 File Download Screen 2 Chose the file save path in management workstation Save As O Config Backup My Recent Documents Fiename ESTER My Network Save as type All Files y Figure 4 2 24 File Save Screen 80 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 19 Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Industrial Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Upload screen in Figure 4 2 25 appears Configuration Upload Browse ito Figure 4 2 25 Configuration Upload Page Screenshot Configuration Upload 1 Click the Bos configuration button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved Choose file Look in Config Backup o ea a fig xml y m My Recent Documents Lg Desktop My Computer T My Network File name conf xml Places Files of type fan Files v Cancel LZ Figure 4 2 26 Windows File Selection Menu Popup Upload 2 Select on the configuration file then click Unoa the bottom of the browser shows the upload status 3 After down the main screen appears Transfer Completed 81 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 20 Image Select This function provides dual image deposit in the Industrial Managed Switch user can select any one of the image as Active image
136. saioa de Sete EER TARE sutededestecedessatuctess sudetvdsstncess cuceteswauuserys 539 7 4 SO AO Oi TAa 539 7 5 Auto Negotiati0N ccccceeeeecsseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeeenseeeeesnsueeeeesaseaeeesaseeceeseseeeeeseseeneeseseeneesnseeneess 540 3 TROUBLE SHOOTIN Gioconda is 541 APPENDE Aa eo 543 A 1 Switch s Data RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T ocooonnocccononnnisncrnancccanencnnarnnanncrannnas 543 A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX ccconcoocnnnnncccconnnnrrnncrrarr rc 543 APPENDEX B GLOSSARY siii ai 545 19 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 1 INTRODUCTION The PLANET Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch IGS 10020MT is all multiple ports Gigabit Ethernet Switched plus two SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features the description of IGS 10020MT is shown as below CESTA Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch 40 75 Degree C Terms of Industrial Managed Switch means the Switch mentioned titled in the cover page of this User s Manual i e IGS 10020MT 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Industrial Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items Check the contents of your package for following parts M The Industrial Managed Switch x1 M Quick Installation Guide x1 M User s Manual CD x1 Y DIN Rail Kit x1 M Wall Mounting Kit X1 M Dust Cap X10 If any of these are missing or d
137. seconds 114 4 5 4 LACP Port Status User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears LACP Status Partner Partner No owomaonyonk UN Auto refresh C Figure 4 5 6 LACP Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partners System ID MAC address e Partner Port Buttons Refresh The partners port number connected to this port Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh E Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds 115 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 5 5 LACP Port Statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Statistics Received Transmitted Unknown Illegal 0 E oO E Oo e o a o
138. seconds default Show IPMC Interface Last Listener Query Interval 529 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IPMC Parameter URI Description Set or show the IPMC Unsolicited Report Interval Syntax IPMC Parameter URI mldligmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_uri Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs ipmc_param_uri 1 Default Value 1 0 31744 Unsolicited Report Interval in seconds default Show IPMC Interface Unsolicited Report Interval 6 24 VLAN Control List Command VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN configuration Syntax VCL Macvlan Configuration VCL MAC based VLAN Add Description Add or modify VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Add lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 530 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Add 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 in VLAN 20 for all port IGS 10020MT gt vcl macvlan add 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 20 1 10 VCL MAC based VLAN Delete Description Delete VCL MAC based VLAN entry Syntax VCL Macvlan Del lt mac_addr gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX Example Delete 00 11 22 33 44 55 66
139. server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the Es client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has b
140. should contain at least one alphabet MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries e Mode Specify the MVR mode of operation In Dynamic mode MVR allows dynamic MVR membership reports on source ports In Compatible mode MVR membership reports are forbidden on source ports The default is Dynamic mode e Tagging Specify whether the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or Tagged with MVR VID The default is Tagged e Priority Specify how the traversed IGMP MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner The default Priority is 0 e LLQI Define the maximun time to wait for IGMP MLD report memberships on a receiver port before removing the port from multicast group membership The value is in units of tenths of a seconds The range is from 0 to 31744 The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one half second e Interface Channel When the MVR VLAN is created click the Edit symbol to expand the corresponding multicast channel settings for the specific MVR VLAN Summary Setting about the Interface Channel Setting of the MVR VLAN will be shown besides the Edit symbol e Port The logical port for the settings e Port Role Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles Inactive The designated port does not participate MVR operations Source Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data
141. some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets a Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets a Forwarding the port is forwarding packets a Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization switch boot to blocking E From blocking to listening or to disabled a From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to di
142. subnet based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack e VECID Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 256 If a VCE ID is 0 application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID e IP Address Indicates the IP address e Mask Length Indicates the network mask length e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new IP subnet based VLAN entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 142 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the switch The Protocol ba
143. switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Note Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully aut
144. tcp lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt Switch ACE keyword Port ACE keyword Port list or all default All ports Policy ACE keyword Policy number 1 8 Tagged of frames any enable disable VLAN ID 1 4095 or any VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and 0x86DD IPv6 Source MAC address xx xx XX XX XX Xx or any Destination MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx or any ARP keyword Source IP address a b c d n or any Destination IP address a b c d n or any ARP operation code anylarp rarp other ARP flags request smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any IP keyword IP protocol number 0 255 or any IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any ICMP keyword ICMP type number 0 255 or any ICMP code number 0 255 or any UDP keyword Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any TCP keyword TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any Permit forwarding default Deny forwarding Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable Port list for copy of frames or disable 428 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lt mirror gt Mirror of frames enable disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt
145. that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new view entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 95 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 3 4 5 SNMPv3 Access Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SNMPv3 Access Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv default view None i default_nw_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view E Add New Entry Save Reset Figure 4 3 7
146. the configuration Group tags lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a Industrial Managed Switch The examples below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic m Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 2 23 amp 4 2 24 appear 79 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT File Download Do you want to open or save this file E Name ntent length_18058Server__PLANET_Web_Server Type XML Document 17 6KB From 192 168 0 100 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or 9 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially save this file What s the
147. the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Industrial Managed Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Industrial Managed Switch the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Industrial Managed Switch performs Store and Fforward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 539 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the
148. the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device 556 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper ca
149. the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 e Qi Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons _Refiesh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID a gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to s
150. the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid e Rising Threshold Rising threshold value e Rising Index Rising event index e Falling Threshold Falling threshold value e Falling Index Falling event index 327 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 17 4 RMON Event Configuration Configure RMON Event table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 4 appears RMON Event Configuraton Delete 10 ere Tyne community Event Last Tne Figure 4 17 4 RMON event configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Desc Indicates this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol snmptrap The number of broad
151. to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Figure 4 2 32 Factory Default Page Screenshot Buttons Yes Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Configuration Factory Reset Done The configuration has been reset The new configuration is available immediately Figure 4 2 33 Factory Default Page Screenshot No Click to return to the web main page without resetting the configuration After the Factory button be pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as following o Default IP address 192 168 0 100 o Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 o Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 o The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the Industrial Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 5 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx Note Hardware Reset button 84 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 22 System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user will re access the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the System Reboot screen in Figure 4 2 34 appears Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Figure 4 2 34 System Reboot Page Screenshot Buttons Ye Click to reboot the system No Click to re
152. up to 10 ports per trunk group Up to 20Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode Provide Port Mirror many to 1 Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port gt Quality of Service E Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control a 8 priority queues on all switch ports 23 MSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol spanning tree by VLAN User s Manual of IGS 10020MT a Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS IP TOS DSCP IP Precedence IP TCP UDP port number Typical network application Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Supports QoS and In Out bandwidth control on each port Traffic policing policies on the switch port DSCP remarking gt Multicast Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 Support MLD Snooping v1 and v2 m Querier mode support m IGMP Snooping port filtering MLD Snooping port filtering MVR Multicast VLAN Registration gt Security IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication Build in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers a m TACACS login users access authentication m RADIUS TACACS users access authentication m P Based Access Control List ACL m MAC Based Access Control List E Source MAC IP address binding m DHCP Snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages m Dynamic ARP Inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding m IP Source Guard
153. where the column displays the following information The Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 5 appears STP Bridges Root Topolo Topolo arideem Root Topology Topology IST 80 00 00 30 4F 10 02 00 80 00 00 30 4F 10 02 00 O Steady Auto refresh C Figure 4 7 5 STP Bridge Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred 154 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 7 4 CIST Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well The CIST Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 6 appears STP CIST Port Configuration CIST Aggregated Port Configuration
154. will be turned off in order to decrease the power consumption It is possible to arrange the ports with different priorities Each priority can be given a temperature at which the corresponding ports shall be turned off The Port Thermal Protection screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Thermal Protection Configuration Temperature settings for priority groups Priority Temperature Port priorities Spool 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Reset Figure 4 4 3 Port Thermal Protection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Temperature settings The temperature at which the ports with the corresponding priority will be turned for priority groups off Temperatures between 0 and 255 C are supported e Port priorities The priority the port belongs to 4 priorities are supported Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 101 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 4 4 Port Thermal Protection Status This page allows the user to inspect status information related to thermal protection The Port Thermal Protection Status screen in Figure 4 4 4 appears Thermal Protection Status Auto refresh C Refresh Thermal Protection Port Status Local Port Port status Port link operating normally Port link operating normally Port link operating normally Port link operating
155. 0 4 9 10 DSCP Classification 2 iein e neea Ee aE EE ce 202 4 9511 QoS Control Listesini dica 203 4 9 11 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration eee ee eeeeee eens eeenneeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeseeeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 205 4 9 12 QoS Status son ese ae ieee heehee ta estad 207 4 9 13 Storm Control Configuration ssrin r ooo 209 A 914 QOS MAIS citar al ados 210 4 9 15 Voice VEAN ConfQuration yy cia iii 211 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 16 Voice VLAN OUI Table 22 2 2 22 cccecsccccteeccecctcedceectdedeecdedecduce tee decendetdedduachdedeesendeeducedieedecendeddneeedeedeagusnedhesteeetese 213 ALTO Access Control List iit cic cote skcctesac E E 214 4 10 1 Access Control List Status soci ads 214 4 10 2 Access Control List Configurations s cc stccccccteeies dai id iii dead 216 AN10 3 ACE Configuration earn 218 4 10 4 ACLPorts CONQUE oc en oe i A ets 226 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration viii od ricas 228 4 11 AUThenticatiON cs cc tices cccctec T cotta eccuteeete ck cde celts E icetapeads debdeszccuapeeddctddertaadvecdectene 230 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication 0 0 0 ee eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeesnaeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeees 231 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration cities 235 4 11 3 Network Access Server ConfiguratiON ooooonconnnncccnnnococcnononnnononononnnonnnnnnnnnnn nn n nn naar rn rnnn rre rre 236 4 11 4 Network Access Overview 3 0 34 cies ciel aise aii 246 4 11 5 Network Access
156. 0 1613 Disable 0 0 0 0 1613 Disable Auto Refresh C Figure 4 11 8 RADIUS Authentication Accounting Server Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Server Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e Status The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled 257 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Server Object Description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server e Status The current state
157. 0020MT 00 30 4F 00 A0 01 _ Get Device Information done Figure 3 7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 47 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This utility show all necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device Name firmware version Device IP Subnet address also can assign new password IP Subnet address and description for the devices After setup completed press Update Device Update Multi or Update All button to take affect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown as below E Update Device use current setting on one single device E Update Multi use current setting on choose multi devices E Update All use current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be finding in Option tools bar To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it can allow assign new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under different IP subnet address Press Connect to Device button then the Web login screen appears in Figure 3 4 Press Exit button to shutdown the planet Smart Discovery Utility 48 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management About Web based Management The Industrial Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Industrial Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard bro
158. 020MT IPv6 AUTOCINFIG Description Set or show the IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Syntax IP IPv6 AUTOCONFIG enable disable Parameters enable Enable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode disable Disable IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IPv6 autoconfig function IGS 10020MT gt ip ipv6 autoconfig enable IPv6 Setup Description Set or show the IPv6 setup Syntax IP IPv6 Setup lt ipv6_addr gt lt ipv6_prefix gt lt ipv6_router gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ipv6_prefix gt IPv6 subnet mask default Show IPv6 prefix lt ipv6_router gt IPv6 router default Show IPv 6 router IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once
159. 0MT STP Port AutoEdge Description Set or show the STP autoEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port AutoEdge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Enable MSTP autoEdge Disable Disable MSTP autoEdge Default enable Example Disable STP edge function on portt IGS 10020MT gt stp port autoedge 1 disable STP Port P2P Description Set or show the STP point2point port parameter Syntax STP Port P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP point2point disable Disable MSTP point2point auto Automatic MSTP point2point detection 455 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default auto Example Disable STP P2P function on port IGS 10020MT gt stp port p2p 1 disable STP Port RestrictedRole Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedRole port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedRole lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted role disable Disable MSTP restricted role Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted role on port IGS 10020MT gt stp port restrictedrole 1 enable STP Port RestrictedTcn Description Set or show the MSTP restrictedTcn port parameter Syntax STP Port RestrictedTcn lt port
160. 1X configuration of port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network nas configuration 1 802 1X Configuration Disabled Disabled Reauth Period 3600 EAPOL Timeout 30 10 Disabled Disabled Disabled 417 Guest VLAN ID Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Frame Seen Disabled Port Admin State Port State Last Source Force Authorized Globally Disabled Security Network NAS Mode Description Set or show the global NAS enabledness Syntax Security Network NAS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Globally enable 802 1X disable Globally disable 802 1X default Show current 802 1X global enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable IEEE802 1X function User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Last ID IGS 10020MT gt security network nas mode enable Security Network NAS State Description Set or show the port security state Syntax Security Network NAS State lt port_list gt autojauthorized unauthorized single multi macbased Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 418 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT auto Port based 802 1X Authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed single Single Host 802 1X Authentication multi Multiple Host 802 1X Authentication macbased Switch authenticates on behalf of the client default Show 802 1X state Default Setting none
161. 20MT 4 11 2 Authentication Configuration This page allows you to configure how a user is authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces The Authentication Method Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Authentication Method Configuration Client Authentication Method Fallback telnet local ssh local web local Reset Figure 4 11 3 Authentication Method Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values None authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch stack for authentication RADIUS use a remote RADIUS server for authentication TACACSt use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to something else than none or local Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 235 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 3 Network Access Server Configuration This
162. 20MT Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them 108 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps Figure 4 5 1 Link Ag
163. 231 Taiwan R O C Person responsible for making this declaration Name Surname Kent Kang Position Title Product Manager Taiwan 18 June 2012 Place Date Legal Signature PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION e mail sales planet com tw http www planet com tw 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528
164. 3 14 AF13 x 15 15 wl 15 15 x 16 CS2 16 CS2 x 16 CS2 16 CS2 x 17 17 17 17 x 200 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT EIEEE IEE GSave Reset Figure 4 9 11 DSCP Translation Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum numbers of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation Translate Classify e Translate The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values e Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side e Egress There are the following configurable parameters for Egress side Remap DPO Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 0 Remap DP1 Controls the remapping for frames with DP level 1 e Remap DPO The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 e Remap DP1 Buttons Save Click to save changes The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values Select the DSCP value from select menu
165. 3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 access entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp access delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 access entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Access Lookup lt index gt 410 Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 access entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp access lookup Model Level default_ro_group any NodAuth NoPriv 2 default_rw_group any NodAuth NoPriv Number of entries 2 Security Network Psec Switch Description Show Port Security status Syntax Security Network Psec Switch lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show port security status IGS 10020MT gt security network psec switch Users L Limit Control 8 802 1X D DHCP Snooping V Voice VLAN Port Users State MAC Cnt No users No users No users 411 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT No users No users No users No users No users No users No users Security Network Psec Port Description Show MAC Addresses learned by Port Security Syntax Security Network Psec Port lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default
166. 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears LACP Port Configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 9 SEMAINE ENE E 66 16 E 40 10 100 0 510113 o Reset Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration Page Screenshot i The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number means selection all ports of Industrial Managed Switch e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys can
167. 8 0 20 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination lt ipv6_addr gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 397 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set SNMP trap IPv6 destination address for 2001 0001 IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap ipv6 destination 2001 0001 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure Description Set or show the SNMP authentication failure trap mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP trap authentication failure disable Disable SNMP trap authentication failure default Show SNMP trap authentication failure mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP trap authentication failure IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap authentication failure disable Security Switch SNMP Trap Link up
168. 9 4 6 11 MAC based VEAN ci e cede ta o de and ol 140 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Status cccccecccecececeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeceeeceaeceaecaaesaaecaceeseseeeceeessaeseaeseaesaesaeesaeeseeseeeseresereseeseeees 141 4 6 13 IP Subnet based VLAN e ascos 142 4 6 14 Protocol based VLAN icon ai 143 4 6 15 Protocol based VLAN Mambership ooooccccncncccnnoccccnononcncnononcnn non nn nano nn rr nnnn nn rn nn rre rre 145 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol omissos acacia inte chasse sdaectucdeceucdeedsesdddeeddecdeevieessazedsectees 146 ATA CORY ore heck es ee atl ee nD ed oe a O a a St ata rat Da a Natt 146 4 1 2 STP System Configuration noviisi erii ai 152 AMBAS a cerdos 154 4 74 CIST Port Configuration doi 155 A A O E A E 158 4 7 6 MSTI Configuration A whee ieee ieee 159 4 7 7 MSTI Ports Configuration sii dia 161 47 8 POM STATUS ca tanto 163 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 7 9 POr Statistics iii aia 164 Ras ras 165 4 8 1 IGMP Snooping viii a ea 165 4 8 2 IGMP Shooping Configuration sssini ina ii dad 169 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN ConfiguratiON ooocconoccnnnoncccnononcnonononcnn nono nonnno nn rr nnnn rra rn n nn rre 170 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering satenii nono nn nr nnrn cnn e aa apa e ai 172 4 8 5 IGMP Snooping Status voii A a rea 173 48 06 IGMP Group INfOrmatON issidein sareren rada iii 174 4 89 IGMPVS NOMINA ti 175 4 8 8 MLD Snooping Configurati N s sniegi a ed ic 176 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration ooooooccnnnccnnnocc
169. AC Address Object The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is one of the following administrative states Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Description e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached e VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module e State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the cli
170. AN ID is the same as the switch port number range lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Add port1 to port4 in PVLAN10 IGS 10020MT gt pvian add 10 1 4 PVLAN Delete Description Delete Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Delete lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range 378 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Delete PVLAN10 IGS 10020MT gt pvian delete 10 PVLAN Lookup Description Lookup Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Lookup lt pvlan_id gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID default Show all PVLANs The allowed range for a Private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range Example Lookup PVLAN IGS 10020MT gt pvian lookup PVLAN ID Ports PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list 379 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable Example Enable isolate for port10 6 7 Security Command Security Switch User Configuration Description Show users configuration Syntax Security Switch Users Configuration Default Setti
171. ARP Inspection ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration The ARP Inspection Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 12 appears ARP Inspection Configuration Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration lt All gt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 12 12 ARP Inspection Configuration Screen Page Screenshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of ARP Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Inspection Configuration e Port Mode Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port All means all ports will have one specific setting 290 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons pen Sse Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 13 ARP Inspection Static Table This page provides Static AR
172. All gt Te lt All gt eaa Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled 7 Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Disabled Disabled OUI Figure 4 9 18 Voice VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation e VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 211 e Age Time User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning age time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will based hardware age time The actual age time will be situated in the age_time 2 age_time interval e Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on Voice VLAN will apply this class
173. Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care 225 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT m Ethernet Type Parameters The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object Description e EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears e Ethernet Type Value When Specific is selected for the EtherTyp
174. D tagging is implemented Tagging 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch E IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame i
175. DP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in 10 IGS 10020MT gt Ildp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 468 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 IGS 10020MT gt Ildp hold 10 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 IGS 10020MT gt Ildp delay 1 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 469 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 IGS 10020MT gt IIdp reinit 3 LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics Example Show LLDP Statistics of port 1 IGS 10020MT gt Ildp statistics 1 LLDP global counters Neighbor entries was last changed at 18819 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries
176. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled a a A A A A ea A fal fa e Figure 4 12 1 Port Limit Control Configuration Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields System Configuration Object Description e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario 275 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up re
177. EEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth 241 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the suppli
178. Filter Switch Figure 4 8 20 MVR Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Group Group ID of the group displayed e Port Switch port number e Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude e Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 When there is no any source filtering address the text None is shown in the Source Address field e Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny e Hardware Filter Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not Switch Buttons Auto refresh ql Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate mI Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR SFM Information Table gt gt e Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 187 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 Quality of Service 4 9 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network s
179. Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 e Max Reauth Count The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Port Configuration The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Admin State The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following
180. IUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Access dotixAuthBackendAcce 802 1X based Challenges ssChallenges Counts the number of times 249 that the switch receives the first request from the backend server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the backend server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the backend User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Rx Other dot1xAuthBackendOther Requests RequestsToSupplicant Rx Auth dot1xAuthBackendAuth Successes Successes Rx Auth dot1xAuthBackendAuth Failures Fails Tx Responses dot1xAuthBackendResp onses server for this port left most table or client right most table 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates that the backend server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the backend server 802 1X and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the ba
181. Industrial Managed Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode 1000Base T can be only connected in Full duplex mode 540 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Industrial Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The per port LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection of the Industrial Managed Switch Performance is bad Solution Check the speed duplex mode of the partner device The Industrial Managed Switch is run at Auto negotiation mode and if the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Per port LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Why the Industrial Managed Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution Check per port LED on the Industrial Managed Switch T
182. It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 351 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting IPv6 AUTOCONFIG mode Disabled IPv6 Link Local Address fe80 6082 cdb9 19ab c0e2 IPv6 Address 1 192 168 0 100 IPv6 Prefix 96 IPv6 Router Example Set IPv6 address IGS 10020MT gt ip ipv6 setup 2001 0002 64 2100 0001 IPv6 Ping Description Ping IPv6 address ICMPv6 echo Syntax IP IPv6 Ping6 lt ipv6_addr gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ipv6_addr gt IPv6 host address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example IGS 10020MT gt ip ipv6 ping 2001 0002 PING6 server 2001 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp _seq 1 time 0ms 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp _seq 2 time 0ms 2 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp _seq 3 time 0ms 68 bytes from 2001 2 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad
183. LAN 177 e Compatibility User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval variable denotes the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 255 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds e LLQI Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listene
184. Level Info Time Message Switch just made a cool boot Figure 4 2 15 Detailed Log Page Screenshot Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Refresh Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID e Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID gt gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID La Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID 71 4 2 13 Remote Syslog User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears The page includes the following fields Object System Log Configuration Server Address Syslog Level Figure 4 2 16 Remote Syslog Page Screenshot Description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode op
185. Limit POrt eisiea erreneren eaer a Seepa eaaa Aa ea rrea Neena aitad rre 415 Security Network Limit Limit sarisi a eee silence tine 415 Security Network Limit Acticin ti 416 Security Network Limit REOPOM swcsice cesseteecescctenanscttprestectes tree iaa 416 Security Network NAS ConfiguratiON ooococcinonnnnnoccccnononnncnnnannnnnonncnnn non n nn nano nn narrar rre 417 Security Network NAS Mode tee deck oda ia aiii ea e ia adia iad adai aea 418 Security Network NAS State srian agaa eSa doce 418 Security Network NAS Reauthentication ooooononinncccnnnococcnonocnnononcncnnnonn nc nono cnn rn n rra nr rra rra 419 Security Network NAS ReauthPeri0d oooooccccnnocccnnoccccnononcncnononcnnnonn cocoa nn nr nono rca rn n rra rr rra rre 420 Security Network NAS EapolTiMedUt ooonoccnnnnnccnnococcnononnncnnnncnononnncnnno nn rn nano rra nn rre rre rr 420 Security Network NAS Agetime ccoo dera 421 Security Network NAS HoldtiME o lt o miririiaia anne ea 421 Security Network NAS RADIUS QoS eiie denned neadis iea Eataa di nn nr n rre 422 Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN 00 0 ceeeseeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeaaeeeeseeeeeesneeeesenaeeeeeenaees 422 Security Network NAS Guest VLAN 0 2 eeeceeeeeeeee seer eeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeesseaaeeeseeeeeeesneeeeesnaeeeenenaees 423 Security Network NAS Authenticate ooooncccnnnnnnnnocccccononnncnonancno nono iendeak i Tide rr 424 Security Network NAS Statistics ooooo
186. M PLANET Networking amp Communication IGS 10020MT a Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T AOO 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch V i g J gt TRE da ca s A CUE User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2012 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate yo
187. MON history Detail page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Indicates the index of History control entry e Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry e Sample Start The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Drops The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRC Alignment The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets 332 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Fragments The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Jabber The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with
188. NAPE o 532 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLC ooo eee ceeeceeeeeneeeeeenneeeenneeeeesaaeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeessaeeeeseaeeeeeneeeeesneeeeseaas 532 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet Il oo ee eececeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeneeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeseneaeeeeneeeeseaas 532 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete SNAP uu eee eeecceeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeecaeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeseaeeeseneeeeesnaeeeeseaas 533 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete LLC 0 0 eeneeeeeenneeeenee cece eaeeeceneaeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeesnaeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeseneeeeneaas 533 MCL Protocol base d VEAN Add citien ieee eia a e a a aE 533 VCL Protocol based VLAN Delet8 ooooooccccnnocccnnococcnononcnononncnnnononcnnnonnnr nono nn nn nn nn nc narran rra r cnn rre n rra n rre 534 VCL Protocol based VLAN ConfiguratiON ooononcccnnnociconononnnononcnonanonnornnon cnn nano nn cnnnn nr rn nn nn nan rene arar nnr anna 534 ASA nn A 534 SMTP COMUN ai ee 534 SMTP Mode SP E o ea es recto e o o e e e e a 534 SMTP Seef ien a e e a Ac 535 SMA AA hoe eal ae EN EAA AE EESE A E EAE T E E E 535 SMTP Auth USET iee A eee So ie 536 SMTP Auth pass ci A A oi ceeded Seated ene bee eee 536 SMTP Mail ON suroccidental 536 SMTP Mallsubject toria tt dt titles 537 18 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT SMTP Mailto di die 537 SMTP MallloZ 00 a rai 537 SMTP Testi ota 538 T SWITCH OPERATION cuicos 539 Tel Address Table nusi AAR EEKEREN du EAEE A E 539 A A 539 TI FOrWardliing amp PINCH Gs
189. O O O O O O O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 gt The page includes the following fields HAA AACA CAA AE aa ia Bl Eeee e eleele Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration Page Screenshot Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark e Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All e Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a fr
190. P Inspection Table The Static ARP Inspection Table screen in Figure 4 12 13 appears Static ARP Inspection Table VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add New Entry Figure 4 12 13 Static ARP Inspection Table Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 291 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 13 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the swi
191. P destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears e TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value e TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e TCP RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry
192. Pv3 Groups Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page a SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page a SNMPv3 Accesses Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears SNMP System Configuration Read Community SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Authentication Failure i Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration Page Screenshot The SNMP System Configuration page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation e Version Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 e Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In a
193. QoS Port Classification DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default DEI for an untagged frame in 1 for port IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Classification dei 1 1 QoS Port Classification Tag Description Set or show if the classification is based on the PCP and DEI values in tagged frames Syntax QoS Port Classification Tag lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable tag classification disable Disable tag classification default Show tag classification mode Default Setting disable Example Enable QoS port classification Tag IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Classification tag 1 10 enable 483 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port Classification Map Description Set or show the port classification map This map is used when port classification tag is enabled and the purpose is to translate the Priority Code Point PCP and Drop Eligible Indicator DEI from a tagged frame to QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS Port Classification Map lt port_list gt lt pcp_list gt lt dei_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp_list gt PCP list or all default All PCPs 0 7 lt dei_list gt
194. Queuing Counters Auto refresh Refresh Clear B N e W j A El oooooocooooo g 00000000093 0000000005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IS co 1091100 on 142 w ja E OD OG Ok oS ke So li ot fc eS ono oleo amp O ao Gon oto A amp Sono ot O MN O Sogo ogo amp ca Figure 4 9 17 Queuing Counters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e QO Q7 There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue e Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Cea Clears the counters for all ports 210 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 15 Voice VLAN Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Voice VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 18 appears Voice VLAN eee Disabled Soto 1000 Aging Time 86400 seconds Traffic Class 7 High El Port Configuration lt All gt lt
195. S 10020MT Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Renew Click to renew IPv6 Auto Configuration This button is only available if IPv6 Auto Configuration is enabled 4 2 4 Users Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level admin 18 Add New User Figure 4 2 4 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name The name identifying the user e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege lev
196. S DSCP Map lt dscp_list gt lt class gt lt dpl gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all default Show DSCP ingress map table i e DSCP gt class DPL lt class gt QoS class 0 7 lt dpl gt Drop Precedence Level 0 1 QoS DSCP Translation Description Set or show global ingress DSCP translation table If port DSCP translation is enabled translation table is used to translate incoming frames DSCP value and translated value is used to map QoS class and DP level Syntax QoS DSCP Translation lt dscp_list gt lt trans_dscp gt Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all default Show DSCP translation table lt trans_dscp gt Translated DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 494 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS DSCP Trust Description Set or show trusted DSCP value which is used for QoS classification The DSCP value to be checked for trust is either translated value ifDSCP translation is enabled for the ingress port or incoming frame DSCP value if translation is disabled for the port Trusted DSCP value is onlyused for QoS classification Syntax QoS DSCP Trust lt dscp_list gt enable disable Parameters lt dscp_list gt DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 list or all enable Set DSCP as trusted DSCP disable Set DSCP as un trusted DSCP default Show DSCP Trust status
197. Statistics cui an 247 4 11 6 Authentication Server ConfiguratiON oooconnnicnnnncccnnnoncncnononnnononn conan nn rr knnt nnn rn nn rro rre rr 254 ANT RADIO VE WE o Me Moet tend elle i A ie nen Meta 257 4 11 8 RADIUS DetallS 00 0 aaa edades 259 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configurati0N ooocononccnnnccccnnnoncncnonannnnnonnccnn non c nn nnnn nn rar nn rra 266 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configura cotorra iia 271 412 SeCUri yn aa a ae aaa e aaa aaa a ea aE aeaaaee Te aaa eee wv nce beet vane aa a eaaa ae OA EAAS ETa Eaa 274 4212 4 o a A NADONS E ETT E E A 274 4312 2 Access Manage ra ais 278 4 12 3 Access Management Statistics omnia lo idos 279 VALA TP St lead o dd A A 280 o e oie ak A E Mead odd Se 8 coach E shed ads the cian Aes shee Wald hs ia onde 281 4 12 6 Port Security Status ii ice 282 4 12 7 Port Security Detail aiser aae ori 284 4 128 DHCP SNOO0PINO isei lit 285 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics e e e a aa eea rea Eae rn nnn nn rr rr cnn rre n cnn AEEA aea aaa oaea Pa er reai eaei iniciat 286 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration nicnn a aE as E beeen E A NEE E aa gT 288 4 12 11 IP Source Guard Static Table sinini a a a aaa e eiaa aa ie i 289 4 1212 ARP Inspection a a a clica 290 441213 ARP Inspection Static Tables irie A is 291 4 13 MAC Address Table ai dd 292 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration oooccononnnnnonccinnnocnnononannnn nono connno nn rr nono cnn rn nn nn rn 292 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status moi oi
198. TION 2 1 Hardware Description The Industrial Managed Switch provides three different running speeds 10Mbps 100Mbps and 1000Mbps in the same Switch and automatically distinguishes the speed of incoming connection This section describes the hardware features of Industrial Managed Switch For easier management and control of the Industrial Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Industrial Managed Switch read this chapter carefully 2 1 1 Physical Dimension E Industrial Managed Switch dimension W x D x H 87 8 x 135 x 56mm IGS 10020MT Mounting Kit Rear View r 5 TF zr gt Ll A t Th ESE I o o 4 o 8 L d ly 2 o DIN Rall Kt lt 3 h o pin E sa za gt A lt a Mounting Kit Dimensions unit mm 28 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 1 2 Front Panel Figure 2 1 shows a front panel of Industrial Managed Switch IGS 10020MT Figure 2 1 IGS 10020MT Switch Front Panel 29 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT HM Reset Button At the left of front panel the reset button is designed for reboot the Industrial Managed Switch without turn off and on the power also can reset the Industrial Managed Switch to factory default mode LNK e ACT O 4 5 Y 1000 Fig
199. The IGMP Type codes are shown below ype Maing Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is 0x11 Present Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave 167 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Gr
200. Tw_sys_tx e Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection echo of the remote link partners respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information 315 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link parther The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the link parther The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP EEE in Sync Shows whether the switch and the link partner have agreed on wake times Red Switch and link partner have not agreed on wakeup times Green Switch and link partner have agreed on wakeup times Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh
201. Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Vide
202. Vs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 0 0 0 0 0 00000000000 O00O0O0O0O0O so ooooco cc9 c amp 00000000000 00000000a oooococ coe 9c O o Auto refresh E l Refresh l Clear Figure 4 14 5 LLDP Statistics Page Screenshot Description Neighbor entries were last changed at It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected Total Neighbors Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring 313 Local Counters User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Description e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port e Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port e Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and disc
203. Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Industrial Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Industrial Managed Switch The changed IP address take effect immediately after click on the Save button you need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 4 Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 51 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 1 Main Web Page The Industrial Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Industrial Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Industrial Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Copper Port Link Status Main Functions Menu SFP Port Link Status 1C5 10020MT gt SNMP y Port Management gt Link Aguregeuon p VLANS Welcome to PLANET gt Spaneuny tree Multicast IGS 10020MT 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP Security gt MAC Adress Table Industrial Ethernet Switch gt LLDP y Dlngnastics PLANET Technology Corporation Loup Protection 20H Nu 96 Miriguan Rd Xander Dist New lee
204. _list gt enable disable 456 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MSTP restricted TCN disable Disable MSTP restricted TCN Default disable Example Eisable STP restricted TCN on port1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt stp port restrictedicn 1 enable STP Port bpduGuard Description Set or show the bpduGuard port parameter Syntax STP Port bpduGuard lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port BPDU Guard disable Disable port BPDU Guard Default disable Example Eisable BPDU guard on port1 IGS 10020MT gt stp port bpduguard 1 enable STP Port Statistic Description Show STP port statistics User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax STP Port Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear the selected port statistics Example Show STP port statistics IGS 10020MT gt stp port statistics Port Rx MSTP TxMSTP RxRSTP TxRSTP RxSTP TxSTP Tx TCN Rxill Rx Unk STP Port Mcheck Description Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax STP Port Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set the STP mCheck Migration Check variable for port 1 IGS 10020MT g
205. a 294 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table niiin rvid aa ieva aai iii 295 4 13 4 Dynamic IP Source Guard Table oooonooccccnociconococcnononcncnononcnnnonn nc nano nn rr nano nn r nora rre 297 A ON 298 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 141 Link Layer Discovery Protocol cioociioocicia e iiaea 298 4 14 2 ELDP Configuration 298 4 14 3 LLDP MED Configuration cccccecceeceesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceaeceaeceaecaaecaeeseeeeeeeceesaeseaeceaecaaesaeesaeeeeeseseseeesereeeesetens 302 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor ccccccccceceeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeseceeeceaeceaeceaeceaesecesecesseeseeeeeesaeceaeceaesaaesaeesaeeseesesesereseeeeeeeaeeaes 308 4 14 5 Neighbor e224 essen Sees sie hee eens eee eis eE E eed diviivee es ede tee live hee 311 4 14 6 Port Statistics inni hernti enti heel ciate aie As heidi bats Aeneas 313 4 14 7 LLDP Neighbours EEE Information oocccocncccnnococcnnnoncnonononcnnnonnncnnno nn rr nn no nnn taniere iaiaaeaia tpi tais 315 AA setceeenscdetecasecedsbets A aE raa E S AAT A AT AET EAE AAA 317 La nal oTo EAE A E EET E A A E E AE E E E A E A sia hon 318 415 2 PV6 PIN iaeaea ad 319 4 15 93 Remote IP Ping Testi di 320 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostico iii 321 4 16 Loop Protection iii a Ii Doa 322 416 1 Configurar ad ori 322 A A ET 323 BATRAMON A A dd AAEE aiii 324 4 17 1 RMON Alarm Configuration sieer deinen rre 324 4 17 2 RMON Alarm Detail et a a to he ee es 326 4703 RMON Alarm Status cuicos 327 4 17 4 RMON Event Configuration
206. a enaa aaea Va aaea dekai aaae 347 IPC GUA E S E A E A E 347 IP DHOP asnar A R A ey ne 348 IP SOLU Be oeaiyssoeshes salsa athe beat asters alte a a a a e ote Oy 348 A O A AI Maen tren Matias aa A 349 PONS de Hn eed nao Be Delt aS hd sab tg Shs OE ik Wand ew gS ond theca eed AE ie NN HA pen dd o tet 350 IP DNS Proxy vii a eet eee 350 PVO AUTOCINFIG cto teta SS ee too Da e e e tt Ne E A 351 IPVO Sel laa 351 OPA A EA E 352 IP NT P Configura idee i vee eee indi 353 IPUNTP Mode ti dl 353 PNTE Server Add escocia eaae A aaea a areae apera ae aerea e bad fel 354 IP NTP Server IPVG AGG ia ccs ehon aa a a E E a a a a a aaaea i eiea 354 IP NTP Server Delete ide 355 6 3 Port Management COMMANU nconnccinnnnnnnonnnncnn rc 356 Port C nfig raton anase pe a nd ee a a i ee es 356 Port Mode ivan iii 356 Port Flow Control Arispe karanaa da 357 POTES A AAA dd 358 Pot Mai e asa 358 POrt Por We incio 359 Port EXcessSiV enaren dne erea aa eae aa 359 O A E TA T O OT 360 A ieee ne aie vee ee heidi deel e ied ee ied eee 360 POS th Rie oa te A AG Rela ee ee a es Ae eee es Re 361 6 4 MAC Address Table Command ccccecccescceeteeeesneeeneneeeeaeeesaeeeneeeeeceaesasaaeeneeeeeeaeeesaesaseaesneeeeseeeseeseenenseees 362 MAC COMPIQUIFATION src tn ed dao apen tit 362 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT MAG AG iii aii 362 IMAG Delete tente ee a oh e e as te I a e E 363 MAC Lookups erea aaa Gets loas 363 MAG Age TUNG a ousaceca ssacecuac a Aa 364
207. able will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear Example Lookup Voice VLAN OUI entry IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan oui lookup Voice VLAN Port Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Port Mode lt port_list gt disable auto force Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disjoin from Voice VLAN auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached on the specific port and configure the Voice VLAN members automatically force Forced join to Voice VLAN default Show Voice VLAN port mode Default Setting disable Example Set auto mode for port 1 4 of Voice VLAN port mode IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan port mode 1 4 auto 516 Voice VLAN Security Description User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Set or show the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephone MAC address in Voice VLAN will be blocked 10 seconds Syntax Voice VLAN Security lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Voice VLAN security mode disable Disable Voice VLAN security mode default Show flow Voice VLAN security mode Default Setting disable Example
208. abled or the values 1 through 128 Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 219 MAC Parameters User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Object Description e SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears e SMAC Value
209. added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop 109 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT It allows a maximum of 10 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 5 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation m
210. adsdsvccedecanpestedessaceentaceecs 520 IPMC Configuration A A ee enti 520 IPMG Mode e lo nadia edo Ree elle ee aay 520 IPMC FIG OCING es cities E sive acbae allele bbeadeas ose elaetede tears Mie E 520 MSA KEEA OD A APEA EEE EE E E A AES E EA 521 17 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT PMC Pro daa 522 IPMC State stent e oh e es o e o INRA rea 522 IPM Queene rn iuris a 523 IPC Easter E ARA aaa 523 IPMG Throttling o li 524 IPMESRiltennat 0 a e Ad eae an ned eee 525 IPM ROUTC EE E E tl drid ea 525 IRM Gs Status a5 cette ota 3s ceo adds cia eat hee teed eat dd o e el o ead et dd ae tl td e 526 IPM Gro a diet 526 IPMG Veritas 527 IPMIG SS Mision e R dd do o A e a Cael 527 PMO Parametros 528 IPMC Parameter ui ass 528 IPMC Rarameter OR lc cocinar Ada 529 IPMC Parameter LLO nssr midaiganes e 529 IPMG Parameter URI 000 a die 530 6 24 VLAN Control List Command e ee e reae rr 530 VCL MAC based VLAN Configuration cooooccnoncccnnnocnnonononnnonono conan cnn r non cnn nan n rr nan rn n rre rra rar nn enn rre 530 VEL MAC basedi VLAN Add thes kage Dg ae le scae tbaddislet ees ieee i beacle A agli ole 530 VCLIMAC based VLAN Delete iio dave de dienes a 531 NV UStASUS ERATE cee steak ee ae eM sats eaves cde aesel a Maa wet day tsbe su amhe deni epacadess bastante reseed 531 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet II cocoononcccnnocanononononanoncno nono no nono utt nono nn taskun cnn nor r cnn rra nn cnn 531 VCL Protocol based VLAN Add S
211. age ojiva rme J meae 7 Info Switch just made a cold boot Info 1970 01 01 Thu 00 02 01 00 00 Link up on port 1 Figure 4 2 14 System Log Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Level The level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Info Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e Time The time of the system log entry e Message The message of the system log entry Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID Clear Car Flushes the selected log entries e Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed La Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID 70 4 2 12 Detailed Log User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The switch system detailed log information is provided here The Detailed Log screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears Detailed System Log Information The page includes the following fields gt Message
212. al Plug and Play MVR Multicast VLAN Registration Voice VLAN Specific VLAN for voice traffic Loop Protect IPMC VCL SMTP Loop Protection MLD IGMP Snooping VLAN Control List SMTP Control Configure 339 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 1 System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax System Configuration all lt port_list gt Parameters all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration port Show switch port configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example To display system information IGS 10020MT gt System configuration System Contact System Name IGS 10020MT System Location Timezone Offset 0 MAC Address 00 30 4F 00 a0 01 System Time 1970 01 01 Thu 02 50 01 00 00 System Uptime 00 10 55 Software Version 1 0b120618 Software Date 2012 06 18T10 43 11 0800 Previous Restart Cold IGS 10020MT gt System Log Configuration Description Show system log configuration Syntax System Log Configuration 340 Example To display system log information IGS 10020MT gt System log configuration System Log Configuration System Log Server Mode Disabled System Log Server Address System Log Level Info IGS 10020MT gt System Version Description Show system version information Syntax System Version Example To display system version IGS 10020MT
213. al of IGS 10020MT Security Switch SNMP Access Add lt group_name gt lt security_model gt lt security_level gt lt read_view_name gt lt write_view_name gt Parameters lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt security_model gt any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_level gt noAuthNoPriv None authentication and none privacy AuthNoPriv Authentication and none privacy AuthPriv Authentication and privacy 409 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lt read_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt write_view_name gt The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 access entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp access add group_snmpv3 usm authpriv snmpv3_view snmpv3_view Security Switch SNMP Access Delete Description Delete SNMPv
214. all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Buttons Save e Reopen Button Click to save changes If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note that clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page Note that non committed changes will be lost 277 4 12 2 Access Management User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Configure access management table on this page The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch The Access Management Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Access Management Configuration Mode Disabled Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TELNET SSH Figure 4 12 2 The page includes the following fields Add New Entry Reset Access Management Configuration Overview Page Screenshot
215. all user modules that may request Port Security services Object Description e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table 282 Port Status User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the switch and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port e Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security e State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values e MAC Count Current Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Cont
216. alues are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Description e Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs e Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology e Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and 153 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot e Port Error Recovery The time that has to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be Timeout enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours The Industrial Managed Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning Es tree protocol While select Compatibles mode the system use the RSTP 802 1w to compatible Note and co work with another STP 802 1D s BPDU control packets Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 3 Bridge Status This page provides a status overview for all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance
217. amaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 1 2 Product Description The PLANET IGS 10020MT is an Industrial 10 Port Full Gigabit Managed Ether Switch special designed to build a full Gigabit backbone to transmit reliable but high speed data in heavy industrial demanding environments and forward data to remote network through fiber optic It provides 8 Port 10 100 1000Base T copper and 2 extra 100 1000Base X SFP fiber optic interfaces delivered in an IP30 rugged strong case with redundant power system Besides supports 20Gbps switch fabric to handle extremely large amounts of video voice and important data in a secure topology the IGS 10020MT provides user friendly but advanced IPv6 IPv4 management interfaces and abundant L2 L4 switching functions It is the best investment for industrial business expanding or upgrading its network infrastructure IPv6 IPv4 Full functioned Secure Switch for Building Automation Networking The IGS 10020MT is the ideal solution to fulfill the demand of IPv6 management Gigabit Ethernet Switch especially in the Industrial hardened environment It supports both IPv4 and IPv6 management functions and can work with original network structure It provides advanced Layer 2 to Layer 4 data switching and redundancy Quality of Service traffic control ne
218. ame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged 124 e Q in Q Mode User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag ether type The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 vMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802 1Q Tag eS The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID Note Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 125 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 5 VLAN Membership E Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 255 VLANs are supported Th
219. ames of any type that have been received by the switch Rx Response ID dotixAuthEapolRespld The number of valid EAPOL FramesRx Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Responses dot1xAuthEapolRespFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx response frames other than Response Identity frames that have been received by the switch Rx Start dot1xAuthEapolStartFra The number of EAPOL Start mesRx frames that have been received by the switch Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFr The number of valid EAPOL amesRx Logoff frames that have been received by the switch Rx Invalid Type dotixAuthInvalidEapolF The number of EAPOL 248 ramesRx frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized Tx Tx Tx Invalid Length Total Request ID Requests User s Manual of IGS 10020MT dot1xAuthEapLengthErr orFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolFrames Tx dot1xAuthEapolReqldFr amesTx dot1xAuthEapolReqFra mesTx The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAPOL Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAPOL Request frames other than Request Identity frames that have been transmitted by the switch e Backend Server Counters These backend RAD
220. anagement port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics screen in Figure 4 15 4 appears VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics CUIDE Cable Status INN TT Port PairA Lenath a Pair Length Pair Lenath Pairb Length D Figure 4 15 4 VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair Buttons Start Click to run the diagnostics 321 4 16 Loop Protection User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well 4 16 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations Shutdown Time General Settings Enable Loop Protection seconds seconds Port Configuration port Enabie action Tx mode lt All gt Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port lt All gt Enable Enable Enable Enable w Enable Enable El Enable w Enable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 mb o Shutdown Port Shutdown Po
221. aps default Show SNMP trap mode Default Setting disable 395 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable SNMP trap mode IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap mode enable Security Switch SNMP Trap Version Description Set or show the SNMP trap protocol version Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Version 1 2c 3 Parameters 1 SNMP version 1 2c SNMP version 2c 3 SNMP version 3 default Show SNMP trap version Default Setting 1 Example Set SNMP trap version in version 2c IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap version 2c Security Switch SNMP Trap Community Description Set or show the community string for SNMP traps Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Community lt community gt Parameters lt community gt Community string Use clear or to clear the string default Show SNMP trap community 396 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting public Example Set private value for SNMP trap community IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap community private Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination Description Set or Show the SNMP trap destination address Syntax Security Switch SNMP Trap Destination lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Example Set SNMP trap destination address for 192 168 0 20 IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap destination 192 16
222. arameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Add MST1 in vlan1 IGS 10020MT gt stp msti add 1 1 STP Port Configuration Description Show STP Port configuration Syntax STP Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Example Show STP status of Port1 IGS 10020MT gt stp port configuration 1 Port Mode AdminEdge AutoEdge restrRole restrTcn Point2point Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Auto 453 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT STP Port Mode Description Set or show the STP enabling for a port Syntax STP Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Enable Enable MSTP protocol Disable Disable MSTP protocol Default disable Example Enable STP function on port IGS 10020MT gt stp port mode 1 enable STP Port Edge Description Set or show the STP adminEdge port parameter Syntax STP Port Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Enable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Edge Disable Configure MSTP adminEdge to Non edge Default disable Example Enable STP edge function on port1 IGS 10020MT gt stp port edge 1 enable 454 User s Manual of IGS 1002
223. ard mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IP Source Guard disable Disable IP Source Guard Default Setting disable 436 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable IP source guard mode IGS 10020MT gt security network ip source guard mode enable Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port mode Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IP Source Guard port disable Disable IP Source Guard port default Show IP Source Guard port mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IP source guard port mode for port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt security network ip source guard port mode 1 4 enable Security Network IP Source Guard Limit Description Set or show the IP Source Guard port limitation for dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard limit lt port_list gt lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dynamic_entry_limit gt unlimited dynamic entry limit 0 2 or unlimited 437 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting unlimited Example Set IP source guard limit IGS 10020MT gt security network ip source guard 1 1 Security Network IP S
224. arded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Org Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received e Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Cta Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 314 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 14 7 LLDP Neighbours EEE Information By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power need time to boot up before sending
225. as been 302 Coordinates Location Object User s Manual of IGS 10020MT detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors Because there is a risk that a LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility for that the neighbors has received the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission is repeated The recommended value is 4 times giving that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when a LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including between Network Connectivity Devices or to other types of links Description e Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator e Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian e Altitude Altitude SHOULD
226. as source ports Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports Receiver Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive multicast data It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group by issuing IGMP MLD messages Be Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting indicates Inactive S indicates Source R indicates Receiver The default Role is Inactive e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port 184 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Add New MVR VLAN Click to add new MVR VLAN Specify the VID and configure the new entry Click Save Save Click to save changes Reset J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 15 MVR Status This page provides MVR status The MVR Status screen in Figure 4 8 18 appears MVR Statistics VLAN ID IGMP MLD IGMP MLD IGMPv1 IGMPv2 MLDv1 IGMPv3 MLDv2 IGMPv2 MLDv1 Queries Received Queries Transmitted Joins Received Reports Received Reports Received Leaves Received No more entries Auto refresh Refresh Clear Figure 4 8 18 MVR Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The Multicast VLAN ID e IGMP MLD The number of Received Queries for IGMP and
227. as the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard e Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not effect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well e Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather
228. ated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN The Port Isolation screen in Figure 4 6 7 appears Auto refresh _ Refresh Port Isolation Configuration Port Number j1j2aj3jajsjo6 j7 8s o i0 Reset Figure 4 6 7 Port Isolation Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 6 10 VLAN setting example Separate VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Trunk Port Isolate 133 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 10 1 Two separate 802 1Q VLAN The diagram shows how the Industrial Managed Switch handle Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLAN Each VLAN isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 6 8 appears and Table 4 1 describes the port configuration of the Industrial Managed Switch AA A A A PAE E EE Me R H 1 l i I 1 i 1 i i i 1 i y I i l 1 4 i i K I i i I i i l l 4 l 1 i I z
229. ater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 6 7 8 Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device Station only Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address Buttons Auto refresh E Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 312 4 14 6 Port Statistics User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refer to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 5 appears 1 0 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt o The page includes the following fields 00000000 00000000 Global Counters Object LLDP Global Counters Global Counters Neighbour entries were last changed 29158 sec ago Total Neighbours Entries Added Total Neighbours Entries Deleted Total Neighbours Entries Dropped Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out LLDP Statistics Local Counters Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TL
230. ating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged ot Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format e VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead 310 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of eight priority levels 0 through 7 e DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation identifies if MAC PHY auto negotiation is supported by the link partner e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation status identifies if auto negotiation is currently enabled at the status link partner If Auto negotiation is supported and Auto negotiation status is disabled the 802 3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value ra
231. ation lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration IGS 10020MT gt lacp configuration Port Mode Key Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active Disabled Auto Active 462 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto Default Setting auto Example Set key1 for port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt lacp key 1 4 1 463 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Sho
232. atistics ID Auto refresh O Port undefined Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRC Alignment Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabber Collisions 64 Bytes 65 127 Bytes 128 255 Bytes 256 511 Bytes 512 1023 Bytes 1024 1518 Bytes oO E oO E o E o ce o 0 0 0 0000 Figure 4 17 11 Loop protection configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Data Source The port ID which wants to be monitored e Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network e Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received e Broad cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multi cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address e CRC Alignment The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets 336 e Under size User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets e Over size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets e Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 oc
233. ave changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 171 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 4 IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port An IGMP filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the IGMP join report is dropped IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new IGMP join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly
234. ay consist of up to 10 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 110 4 5 1 Static Aggregation User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors The Static Aggeration screen in Figure 4 5 2 appears Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled e Destination MAC The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for Address the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled e IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate th
235. be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance e Map Datum The Map Datum used for the coordinates given in this Option WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical 303 Civic Address Location User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Object Description e Country
236. be placed in almost any difficult environment Flexibility and Extension Solution The two mini GBIC slots built in the IGS 10020MT support Dual Speed 100Base FX and 1000Base SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber optic modules that means the administrator now can flexibly choose the suitable SFP transceiver according to the transmission distance or the transmission speed required 21 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Industrial Managed Switch and how to physically install the Industrial Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Industrial Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Industrial Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI MODE The section explains how to manage the Industrial Managed Switch by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Industrial Managed Switch Section 8 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Industrial Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Industrial Managed Switch Appendix B The section contains Glossary informati
237. ble unicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 32768k Default Setting disable Example Enable unicast storm control in 2fps IGS 10020MT gt QoS Storm Unicast enable 2 496 QoS Storm Multicast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable multicast storm control disable Disable multicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in fps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps 32768k User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified and if it is a new entry added the QCE will be placed last in the list Otherwise if the next QCE ID is not specified and if existing QCE is modified QCE will be in the same location in the list To modify and move the entry to last in the list use the word last fo
238. c 63 A och stee a dtd Uk Maen ashes Seat od Sd dt a ANS Ga R 64 A283 DHCP Relay O o T 65 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics iii cial 67 C Ke AUE oE Ta E bo ed lo e os a e eed lot 69 4 211 System A aa a a a a a AS 70 EPPA eTo MOG EEA EA EE E as een EA E EE E E EETA T 71 4 213 Remote Syslog iueiai e a a a a a od ee e ae d aii edni 72 42 14 SMTP Contigua 73 4 215 EEE Power Reduction sinio i a a e o e e a a E aaae 75 4216 Web Firmware Upgrade e E tarta 77 4 2 17 TETP Firmware Upgrade miii iaa aA 78 4 2 18 Configuration Backup iaa od daros 79 4 2 19 Configuration Upload vaccine id Aerea aiaa rrei SEKE uaitse 81 4 220 Maje elect ati tees beak eek ze nse Sie heads fe CA teats eet Naan ede ER 82 4 2 21 Factory Default ici A a ede 84 42 22 System Red pra 85 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocoll ssccssecceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeescaaesasneeeeeeeeseaesaseesnseeeseeeseseaesesenenes 86 4 34 SNMP OVNIS ni A e coe abt yet ad o edo 86 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration ooooocccnnoccccnonocnnononcccnononnncnnno cnn nro n nn nn kuun rr nene 87 4 3 3 SNMP System Information siii dad 90 4 3 4 SNMPy3ConfiguratiON coccion io aida 91 4 3 4 1 SNMPV3 COMMUNITIES vicio iras 91 43 42 SNMPV3 Users 20 a 92 ALIAS 3 Groups ii tot 94 4 3 4 4 SNMPV3 VIEWS i cite eee ec ci Se at cone Rk ees ee ee ei toe ee Rone er de ae ee 95 4 3 4 5 SNMPyY3 ACCESS toi dade Gente a veches Sete a Saat eds Sec assent Gade Seed toe eee deeeentee 96 4 4 Port MANAGE ME a 98
239. can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Industrial Managed Switch As the Figure 2 5 appears a MGB MFB Series Module Figure 2 5 Plug in the SFP Transceiver Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Industrial Managed Switch supports 100 1000 dual mode with both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Gigabit SFP Transceiver Modules MGB GT SFP Port 1000Base T Module MGB LX SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module MGB L50 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 50km MGB L120 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 120km MGB LB10 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm mini GBIC module 10km MGB LB20 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm mini GBIC module 20km MGB LB40 SFP Port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1550nm mini GBIC module 40km 39 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT MGB TLX SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 10km 40 75 C MGB TL70 SFP Port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 70km 40 75 C Fast Ethernet SFP Transceiver Modules MFB FX SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 1310nm 2km MFB F40 SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 1310nm 40km MFB FA20 SFP Port 100Base BX Transceiver WDM TX 1310nm 20km MFB TFX SFP Port 100Base FX Transceiver 1310nm 2km 40 75 C E aA It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Industrial Managed Switch If you insert a SFP A tran
240. cant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form XX XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment who
241. cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol logandtrap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public e Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event 328 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 17 5 RMON Event Detail This page provides an overview of RMON event entries screen in Figure 4 17 5 appears Detailed RMON Event ID Y Auto refresh C1 LogTime 0 LogDescription 0 Figure 4 17 5 Detailed RMON Event ID page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry e Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry e LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Auto refresh Lt Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 329 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 17 6 RMON Event Status This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the
242. ccessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP A router port is a port on
243. ccnononononononn nn nono cnn noo n nn nano nn r rra rn 440 Security Network ARP Inspection ENtlY oocononncnnnccccnnnoccnonononnnononnncnn nn n nc nono cnn ran n nr narrar rre rre 440 Security Network ARP Inspection Status oooooooinnccnnnniccccnonocnnononcccnnnonnnn nono cnn rro n nn naar rr rra 441 Security AAA ConfiGuration veria aia 441 Security AAA Timeout coca a Ai ences 442 Security AAA Deadtime ii A atac 443 Security AAA RADIUS inician 443 Security ARA ACCT RADIUS ernest anpra ahak ra naapa tira 444 Security AAA TAGA CS Fe aa A ado nd tl S 445 Security AAA Statistics ine na i cede a ii e tie eee dente eel eddie dedia 445 6 8 Spanning Tree Protocol Command commnccccnnnnnninnncccaccer cr 446 STP COMMGUPATION ii 446 STP Version iii ibi 446 SIP A O IS te Ml ae ee ee aes 447 STP MaxHops 2300 hie a i ec en eee ee ee 447 STEP MaxAGe ennie a eee oon eee eos 448 STP FWdDelay ontario 448 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT STP CNaMe vi ta 449 STP BPDU Filter toscas ciar este e ti o e e e e et a 449 STP BRDU Guard 25s tseis cs she shas tes es e ene se ed e cal a e e le SINS AS ne dan sde le dE An os 450 DEP RECOVEMY O TOT T E E O 450 ARE E O OO 451 STP MSTIPHON annen o ee ed o lo aac A a E 452 STP IMST Mapeo tai tata dl 452 STP MSW AGG ot 222 a rcs din ceso cada cdo a od te toa dl od ca dl od ads the ia nd es ld ia dd 453 STP Port Configuration y 2 5 da iaa 453 SEP Pom MOG a o foe tia ook 454 SUP POM BAG eiitsscssce sce teeta
244. ce 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration 305 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Object Description e Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save e Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports e Application Type Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications
245. ce characters are permitted as part of a contact clear Clear system contact Default Setting empty Example To set device contact IGS 10020MT gt System contact System Log Server Address Description Show or set the system log server address Syntax System Log Server Address lt ip_addr_string gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string Default Setting empty Example To set log server address IGS 10020MT gt log server address 192 168 0 21 System Location Description Set or show the system location Syntax System Location lt location gt clear 343 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt location gt System location string 1 255 Use clear or to clear the string In CLI no blank or space characters are permitted as part of a location clear Clear system location Default Setting empty Example To set device location IGS 10020MT gt System location 9F LAB System Log Level Description Show or set the system log level lt uses to determine what kind of message will send to syslog server Syntax System Log Level info warninglerror Parameters info Send informations warnings and errors warning Send warnings and errors error Send errors Default Setting info Example To set log level IGS 10020MT gt log level warning 344 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syst
246. ceive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled 507 MVR Group Description Show the MVR group Syntax MVR Group MVR Status Description Show the MVR status Syntax MVR Status MVR Mode Description Set or show the MVR mode Syntax MVR Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable MVR mode User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt mvr mode enable 508 MVR Port Mode Description Set or show the MVR port mode Syntax MVR Port Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MVR mode disable Disable MVR mode default Show MVR mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the MVR port mode for port 1 4 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt mvr port mode 1 4 enable MVR Multicast VLAN Description Set or show MVR multicast VLAN ID Syntax MVR Multicast VLAN lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show current MVR multicast VLAN ID Default Setting 100 Example Set VLAN 1000 for MVR multicast VLAN ID IGS 10020MT gt mvr multicast vlan 1000 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT MVR Port Type Description Set or show MVR port type Syntax MVR Port Type lt port_list gt source rece
247. ch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is shown on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functiona
248. cinononnnonononcnnnonn nc nnno nr rr nano rca nn nn rre 177 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering lt ioomorcirniio ino tit cias 179 4 8 11 MLD Snooping MAyUS Aaa 180 4 8 12 MLD Groups Information iii dates 181 4 8 13 MLDv2 Informatio Ns nosiniai iaa chev bee a a ended debe a a aaa 182 48 14 MVR err a a e e e tees ager e ea eee dae a area e aea eet tee alt 183 48 10 MVR Oi US a feral ee nD ed es a th be ado med bk Sd a dl Noe ai mS a al dd o e ed 185 4 8 16 MVR Groups Information sico ii 186 4 8 17 MVR SFM Information icon aiii 187 4 9 Quality Of Service Seat cence ne seed ects aane ea taadaa cd Taoa daen aeaa Kaadaa aen deca aa aesae ne eaea 188 4 9 1 Understand QOS nasin aier n A dis 188 4 9 2 elate leao ME E E E E AT 189 4 9 3 POr Classica tOn e a a a E a a aa i aaa 190 4 9 3 1 QoS Ingress Port Tag Classification cece e cence eens eeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeesaaeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeaas 191 4 9 4 Port Scheduletiz cscscchsiicss a A A e Aa E a A A AE A a AAS AR AA A a AA REE N ANni 192 4 9 5 Port SHAPING ien a eaea a a aa a a a 193 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers 0occcccococccnnoccccnononcnononononnnonnncnnnonnnn non cnn nan nr rr narran nn rrnnnr rr 194 4 9 6 P rt TA RM tad dit 195 4 9 6 1 QoS Egress Port Tag RemarkinQ ooocooccccnnoncccnoconnnonononcnanencnn nono cnn nan nn iiaae aaar 196 A A 197 4 9 8 DSCP Based DOS cc hic bananas E a e e Bee 199 4 9 9 DSCP Translation 0 a e e E R N Lis 20
249. ck Cancel Figure 4 11 17 Add User Properties Screen 270 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 4 11 10 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Go to Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window 3COM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity i Mi va aoe 146 938 760 110 212 126 Sent Received Figure 4 11 18 271 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X
250. ckend server 802 1X based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the backend server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the backend server Possible retransmissions are not counted 250 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT MAC based Counts all the backend server packets sent from the switch towards the backend server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth Name IEEE Name Description MAC dot1xAuthLastEapolF The MAC address of the last supplicant client Address rameSource VLAN ID The VLAN ID on which the last frame from the Version dot1xAuthLastEapolF rameVersion Identity 251 last supplicant client was received 802 1X based The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable 802 1X based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Selected Counters Object User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Description e Selected Counters Attached M
251. cluded lt oid_subtree gt Parameters lt view_name gt A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should excluded lt oid_subtree gt The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view Example Add SNMPv3 view entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp view add snmpv3_view include 1 Security Switch SNMP View Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 view entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp view delete 3 408 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 view entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 view entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp view lookup Idx View Name View Type OID Subtree default_view included 2 snmpv3_viwe included Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP Access Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 access entry The entry index key are lt group_name gt lt security_model gt and lt security_level gt Syntax User s Manu
252. cription Set or show DHCP relay agent information option mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation the agent insert specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and remote it from a DHCP message when transferring to DHCP client It only works under DHCP relay operation mode enabled Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode disable Disable DHCP relay agent information option mode default Show DHCP relay agent information option mode Default Setting disable 432 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable DHCP relay agent information option mode IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp relay information mode enable Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy Description Set or show the DHCP relay mode When enable DHCP relay information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Information Policy replace keep drop Parameters replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information default Show DHCP relay inf
253. cs Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview ort 44507 No co mm Ei O D O G Oo e o E oO n o e o a o fa o a o o E oO G o a o a o a o g i 7 SO0oO0oO0DOoOoDOoOoOoO OOOO DOODOOoOOoO OOOO e o a o o i 2 3 4 5 6 8 3 10 EN O i O 2 O E Auto refresh O Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately leal o Clears the counters for all ports 100 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 4 3 Port Thermal Protection This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current setting for controlling thermal protection Thermal protection is used to protect the chip from getting overheated When the temperature exceeds the configured thermal protection temperature ports
254. cted to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 234 User s Manual of IGS 100
255. d of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses A ro
256. d to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Industrial Managed Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Industrial Managed Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Industrial Managed Switch it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Industrial Managed Switch will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Industrial Managed Switch will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Industrial Managed Switch stores
257. d values 179 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Status This page provides MLD Snooping status The IGMP Snooping Status screen in Figure 4 8 14 appears Auto refresh L Refresh Clear MLD Snooping Status Statistics VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries V1 Reports V2 Reports V1 Leaves ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Router Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 bh Figure 4 8 14 MLD Snooping Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queriers Transmitted The number of Transmitted Querier e Queriers Received The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V1 Leave Received The number of Received V1 Leaves Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Clear p cea Clears MLD Snooping Status counters 180 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 12 MLD Groups Information Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this pa
258. ddition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet e Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users The SNMP Trap Configuration page includes the following fields Object Description e Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation e Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 e Trap Community Indicates the
259. des a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest 238 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the
260. dministrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users 59 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Delete User Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user Users Configuration User Name Privilege Level 1 min Test Add New User Figure 4 2 6 User Configuration Page Screenshot After change the default password if you forget the password Please press the Reset button es in the front panel of the Industrial Managed Switch over 5 seconds and then release the current setting includes VLAN will be lost and the Industrial Managed Switch will restore to the default mode Note User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 5 Privilege Levels This page provides an overview of the privilege levels After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new user name and password the screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears Privilege Level Configuration Configuration da sad Execute Status Statistics Status Statisti aac I write Read only e a alo a cio auc ai 1 aaa 5 aana o col ia ma O om 5 x s y 5 y s y 5 y
261. dness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS VLAN IGS 10020MT gt security network nas radius_vlan enable Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness and parameters use the global keyword or per port enabledness of Guest VLAN Unless the global keyword is used the lt reauth_max gt and lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt parameters will not be unused Syntax Security Network NAS Guest_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable lt vid gt lt reauth_max gt lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt Parameters global Select the global Guest VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port Guest VLAN setting default Show current per port Guest VLAN enabledness enable disable enable Enable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable Guest VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current Guest VLAN enabledness lt vid gt Guest VLAN ID used when entering the Guest VLAN Use the global keyword to change it default Show current Guest VLAN ID lt reauth_max gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the beginning of the command The number of times a Request Identity EAPOL frame is sent without reasponse before considering entering the Guest VLAN default Show current Maximum Reauth Count value lt allow_if_eapol_seen gt The value can only be set if you use the global keyword in the begi
262. do any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 6 appears IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Save Reset Figure 4 8 6 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e IGMP Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected e IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is GMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is GMP Auto 170 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e RV Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for
263. ds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval e Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port e Mode Select LLDP mode All means all ports will have one specific setting 299 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped t
264. duce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 4 6 3 VLAN Basic Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears VLAN Basic Information LAN Basic Information Mode IEEE 802 10 Maximum VLAN ID 4095 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning PL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch a Port Based E IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Industrial Managed Switch e Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Industrial Managed Supported VLANs Switch e Current number of Display the current number of VLANs VLANs e VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Industrial Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vlan learning 121 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Configurable PVID Indicates whether or not configurable PVI
265. e Example Delete the policy 1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt IIldpmed policy delete 1 LLDPMED Policy Add Description Adds a policy to the list of polices Syntax LLDPMED policy add voice voice_signaling guest_voice guest_voice_signaling softphone_voice video_conferencing streaming_video video_si gnaling tagged untagged lt vlan_id gt lt I2_priority gt lt dscp gt Parameters voice Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting 473 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications voice_signaling Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media guest_voice Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services guest_voice_signaling Guest Voice Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media softphone_voice Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support
266. e factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Industrial Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears Connect to 192 168 0 100 4 4 The server 192 168 0 100 at Web Management requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login Screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 50 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Pener HER TGS 10020MT p System p SNMP Port Management gt Link Ayy eysuun Mi ten Welcome to PLANET Multicast IGS 10020MT 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP gt MAC Adress Table Industrial Ethernet Switch LLDP DIngnastics PLANET Technology Corporation Loup Protection 10H Nu 96 Mirnguan Rd Xander Dist Mew lapes City 231 lerman R O C RMON Tel YUL 2 2219 9518 fexcQ8o 2 2219 3528 Email apro planet sor tay Car ARICA MARET Terri Capa on Al catty owned Figure 4 1 3 Default Main Page Now you can use the
267. e 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Object Description e Emergency Call Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN Service identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voi
268. e multicast VLAN Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Buttons Static Select VLAN Users from this drop down list Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately 4 6 8 Private VLAN The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs The Private VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 6 appears 130 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Auto refresh C Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Pore embers Dee rviaw 0 x 2 3 5 5 7 8 9 Jo 1 ME E E M
269. e Counters Rx 64 Bytes Tx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Rx Q0 Tx Q0 Rx Q1 Tx Q1 Rx Q2 Tx Q2 Rx Q3 Tx Q3 Rx Q4 Tx Q4 Rx Q5 Tx Q5 Rx Q6 Tx Q6 Rx Q7 Tx Q7 Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops Tx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Tx Late Exc Coll Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered DOR ogogo E oo Figure 4 4 5 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description e Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets e Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause Account of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation 103 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT
270. e Level Configuration 381 Example Show privilege level IGS 10020MT gt security switch privilege level configuration Privilege Level Configuration Priviliege Level CRO CRW SRO SRW 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 15 15 15 15 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 1 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 5 10 382 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch Privilege Level Group Description Configure a privilege level group Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Group lt group_name gt lt cro gt lt crw gt lt sro gt lt srw gt Parameters lt group_name gt Privilege group name lt cro gt Configuration read only privilege level 1 15 lt crw gt Configuration Execute read write privilege level 1 15 lt sro gt Status Statistics read only privilege level 1 15 lt srw gt Status Statistics read write privilege level 1 15 Example Change privilege level of MVR group IGS 10020MT gt security switch privilege level group mvr 15 15 15 15 Security Switch Privilege Level Current Description Show the current privilege level Syntax Security Switch Privilege Level Current Default Setting 15 Security Switch Auth Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security Switch Auth Configuration 383 Example Show authentica
271. e Screenshot Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name Buttons Add New Entry Save Click to save changes A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Click to add a new group entry Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 94 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 3 4 4 SNMPv3 Views Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears SNMPv3 View Configuration View Type OID Subtree Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Views Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name
272. e destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled 111 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members ESA Group D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Normal 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 112 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT
273. e filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OXFFFF but excluding 0x800 IPv4 Ox806 ARP and 0x86DD IPv6 A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 10 4 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears ACL Ports Configuration Port Policy ID E ili EVC Policer EVC Policer ID oe Mirror Logging Shutdown State Limiter ID Redirect A 0 lt All gt lt All gt y 0 lt All gt lt All gt lt All gt y lt ai gt x lt an gt w 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled y 2 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled y 3 0 Disablec Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled y Disabled y 4 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled w Disabled y 5 0 Disablec Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled y Disabled
274. e in 1000 IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Policer Rate 1 10 1000 485 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QoS Port Policer Unit Description Set or show the port policer unit Syntax QoS Port Policer Unit lt port_list gt kbps fps Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports kbps Unit is kilo bits per second fps Unit is frames per second default Show port policer unit Default Setting kbps Example Set the port policer unit in fps IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Policer unit 1 10 fps QoS Port Scheduler Mode Description Set or show the port scheduler mode Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show port scheduler mode Default Setting strict 486 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set the port schedule mode in weighted mode IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Scheduler Mode 1 10 weighted QoS Port Scheduler Weight Description Set or show the port scheduler weight Syntax QoS Port Scheduler Weight lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Weighted queue list or all default All weighted queues 0 5 lt weight gt Scheduler weight 1 100 QoS Port QueueShaper Mode Description S
275. e operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 280 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 5 SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status The SSH Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 5 appears SSH Configuration Mode Disabled v Figure 4 12 5 SSH Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mode operation Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes
276. e outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other Promiscuous Promiscuous Public Servers A a Access Deny Access Deny Access Deny Private VLAN Port Isolate For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups E Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN 132 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isol
277. e presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET Industrial 8 Port 10 100 1000T 2 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch User s Manual FOR MODEL IGS 10020MT REVISION 1 0 JUNE 2012 Part No EM IGS 10020MT_v1 0 2080 AH0560 000 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT TABLE OF CONETNTS 1 INTRODUC TION o RR 20 TL Packet Contents oaa eaoat aaant a aeaea ea eaaa raaa aaa a tinue ented escbenctuadeesdevess iennccesucdetvensctedsencescueeees 20 1 2 Product Descr pi ON a e eea a a cece Ear tule a a Ear e aae e aa aaan paanan ani 20 1 3 How to Use This Manual ssssssunseunnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnunnnnnnununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennenen nannan 22 1 9 Product Features ccc iiss cscs reckccdceniceteete cided cetbececetekeddvebbcatehd eaddauceetat adds eedectees eatececevionecss stendeeviestansantehrs 23 1 5 Product Specification couecVensectsuacericeeesmectslicevaesTeusectfeaees 26 2 INSTALLATION oneroso AAA AAA AAA ROA AAA SARA EI 28 2 1 Hardware DescriptiON ui ii 28 221 1PhysicaDIMENSION patas dalt fnac 28 2 We Front Rae e Saeed be ean tt a a E 29 2 13 LED INdicatorS eae ieai ae A A iia 31 2 14 Switch Upper Pela ria 32 2 2 Install the Industrial Managed Switch
278. e use of excess bandwidth disable Disable use of excess bandwidth default Show port queue excess bandwidth mode Default Setting disable 488 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable the port queue excess bandwidth mode IGS 10020MT gt qos Port QueueShaper Excess 1 10 0 7 enable QoS Port Shaper Mode Description Set or show the port shaper mode Syntax QoS Port Shaper Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port shaper disable Disable port shaper default Show port shaper mode Default Setting Enable Example Enable port shaper mode IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Shaper Mode 1 10 enable QoS Port Shaper Rate Description Set or show the port shaper rate Syntax QoS Port Shaper Rate lt port_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 3300000 489 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting 500kbps Example Set the port shaper rate in 1000 IGS 10020MT gt qos Port Shaper Rate 1 10 1000 QoS Port TagRemarking Mode Description Set or show the port tag remarking mode Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking Mode lt port_list gt classified default mapped Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports classified Use classified PCP DEI va
279. e80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 354 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example To add IPv6 NTP server IGS 10020MT gt ip ntp server ipv6 add 1 2001 7b8 3 2c 123 IP NTP Server Delete Description Delete NTP server entry Syntax IP NTP Server Delete lt server_index gt Parameters lt server_index gt The server index 1 5 Example To delete NTP server IGS 10020MT gt ip ntp server delete 1 355 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 3 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Example Display port1 4 status IGS 10020MT gt port configuration 1 4 Port Configuration Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Enabled Disabled Disabled Discard Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt auto 1Ohdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fd
280. ed Example Set the max learn 10 groups for ICMP port throttling IGS 10020MT gt ipmc throttling igmp 1 10 10 524 IPMC Filtering Description Set or show the IPMC port group filtering list Syntax IPMC Filtering mld igmp lt port_list gt add del group_adar Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port group filtering entry del Del existing port group filtering entry default Show IPMC port group filtering list group_addr IPv4 IPv6 multicast group address accordingly IPMC Router Description Set or show the IPMC snooping router port mode Syntax IPMC Router mldligmp lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IPMC router port disable Disable IPMC router port default Show IPMC router port mode Example Enable port 1 in IPMC router port User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt ipmce riuter igmp 1 enable 525 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IPMC Status Description Show IPMC operational status accordingly Syntax IPMC Status mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC ope
281. ediate 145 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 7 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 7 1 Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w a MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to netw
282. een successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 11 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 233 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Authentication Server 802 1X Switch RADIUS f 4 E EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity Client EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request _ gt S EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge gt gt gt S EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 11 2 EAP Message Exchange a Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is conne
283. eeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaeeeseneeeeesaeeeseeaeeesseeeeeesnateeeeeaaes 389 Security Switch Access Add i sc a eh eiin se odas 389 Security Switch Access IPVG Add irsinin deidad 390 Security Switch Access Delete itinere 391 Security SwitchiAccess LOOKUP tt A a 391 Security Switch Access Clea iii e a aidi iiia a idid i atiii 392 Security Switch Access Statistics isokan Ea a aA E E a Eea a R Ee EAEE AARAA AAEE R E AA AERES 392 Security Switch SNMP Configuration ooooocccnnnnccnnococcnanoncnnnonononn nono cc nnno nn nn norris 393 Security Switch SNMP Mode eee ee eeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeceeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeesneeeeessnateeesenaes 393 Security Switch SNMP Version enlivened ie eters eet eens 393 Security Switch SNMP Read Community c cccooocccccococcnononcnonononcno noc ncnn nono nc nnnn rca r nn n nn rre rr rra rra 394 Security Switch SNMP Write Community ccooonccnnoccccnononcnonononcno nono cc nano untiin netk uantu unatu rra rra 395 Security Switch SNMP Trap Mode si reii ieta ie aaa eei a aata rre 395 Security Switch SNMP Trap VetsiOnis nenii i a iea iaid Niii Taa 396 Security Switch SNMP Trap CoMmunity c ccccoooccnnnoccccnanoncncnononcno nono ncnn no nn nn nono rn rn 396 Security Switch SNMP Trap DestinatiON ooooooonnnnccnnnnociccnonacanononcncnnnonnn crono cnn nnon eii daianto aiii 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap IPv6 Destination oocononccnnnociconoccccnononnncnon cnn n nono nnnn no nc
284. eet ete on 467 WL DP IMtCVall sages seseterececectenanlcatt at da tries ceda 468 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT EEL DP Hold iia 468 TRE zoe Zee eae TEE TEE ec e e a O e E 469 US DP Relmit amo eee eel eel e roca ela ce el a elo e Se Ms Gas 469 LLORA Aia adn 470 A ethno eee ind Se ee ee ee oe 470 6 12 ELDPMED Command siii id dd dE ii 471 LLDPMED ConfiguratiOn seciaitician id 471 ULDPMED CiVIC cuac eden aaa 472 BED PMEDsE CS 20 tocata 5 tibet arco acot ata Moat ie sha de ando dll ao en dl dd o ed e a cd 473 LLDPMED Policy Delete 000 da 473 ULDPMED Policy Add ica a o a A S E a 473 LEDPMED Port Policy teree le idea dardo dd a a dde el a do eta e det de de 474 PLEDPMEDConrdi ates aa 475 LLOPMED Datum a ains 475 ULDPMED East A ed ieee 476 MSEMA o A E E E E E A E cada 476 6 13 EEE Command iisas aaa e T e aaa aaae iii 477 EEE Configuracion a das 477 EEE Mode o Re ha 477 EEE Urgent Queues ii dd vie ede 478 6 14 Thermal Commandin ii id 479 Thermal Priority Temperature cv tie 479 Thermal Port Prionty co lboasstenddu daria 479 Thermal SAUS iii AA aaa A ida 480 Thermal Configuration A pe 480 6 15 Quality of Service Command conmmcincccnccconnnecnc cr 481 QoS Configura ai ice 481 QoS Port Classification Class iio 481 QoS Port Classification DP lsrs eiiieaen cote vats o aa ee aaa eraa a aai ataia oriita 482 G0S Port Glassification POP coc it 482 QoS Port Classification DE leiser a deg stoic ste cuadtie E dein dendetee E
285. el 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 58 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Add New User Add Edit User This page configures a user add edit or delete user Click to add a new user Add User User Settings Password again Privilege Level Save Reset Cancel Figure 4 2 5 Add Edit User Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores e Password The password of the user The allowed string length is 0 to 32 e Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an a
286. em Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 Example To set timezone IGS 10020MT gt system timezone 0 System Log Lookup Description Show or clear the system log Syntax System Log Lookup lt log_id gt alllinfo warning error clear Parameters lt log_id gt System log ID or range default All entries all Show all levels default info Show informations warning Show warnings error Show errors clear Clear log 345 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example To show system log IGS 10020MT gt system log lookup Number of entries Level Time Message Switch just made a cold boot 2 Info 1970 01 01T00 00 05 00 00 Link up on port 8 IGS 10020MT gt System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings IGS 10020MT gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration 346 Example To restore default value but not reset IP address User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt system restore default keep_ip System Load
287. ength is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt group_name gt A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Add SNMPv3 group entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp group add usm admin_snmpv3 group_snmpv3 406 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 group entry User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp group delete 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 group entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 group entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp group lookup Idx Model Security Name private v2c public v2c private usm default_user Number of entries 5 Group Name default_ro_group default_rw_group default_ro_group default_rw_group default_rw_group 407 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch SNMP View Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 view entry The entry index key are lt view_name gt and lt oid_subtree gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP View Add lt view_name gt included ex
288. ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are None None privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new user entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 93 4 3 4 3 SNMPv3 Groups User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 Group Configuration Delete Security Moda The page includes the following fields Object public default_ro_group private default_rw_group public default_ro_group private default_rw_group default_user default_rw_group Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Pag
289. ent it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds e Last Authentication Buttons Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 252 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Cta This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Click to clear the counters for the selected port Clear All This button is available in the following modes Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth X Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however _ Clear This This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters 253 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 6 Authentication Server Configuration This page allows you to configure the Authentication Servers The Authentication Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 7 appears Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration a enabied iP address vostname pon
290. eration e Server Address Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Buttons Save Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send informations warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 72 4 2 14 SMTP Configuration User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Configure SMTP Configuration on this page The SMTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 17 appears sys smtp conf SMTP Mode L Enable SMTP Server lt 128 Digits SMTP Port 1 65535 SMTP Authentication Enable Authentication User Name lt 64 Digits lt 21 Digits Email From lt 128 Digs lt 64 Digits lt 128 Digis lt 128 Digs The page includes the following fields Object e SMTP Mode Reset Figure 4 2 17 SMTP Configuration Page Screenshot Description Enabled It is for you to enable SMTP mode function This mode offers you to configure SMTP server and SMTP account information system will refer it to send an E mail for alarm noticing e SMTP Server It is for you to set up a specify SMTP server DNS name or IP address If it is inputted a DNS name please remember to input DNS server IP address at IP configuration page e SMTP Port It
291. eredccatnanseseduenentecboseasdaesressunessusececspaecenssasedeets 506 6 20 MYR Com MaA sich cccretes cee ci aes Sane ae aes ar sa ae aaao sae eae fae tas aca ses Sera hed tae toa ae haw egndot ca 507 MVR Configuration tanen e a Va ek ee ee ed 507 MVR Group sei tev i soded it aid bas 508 MVR Status outside dada id 508 MVR M de 4 2 x2 3e costoso tite a e a dl dl eso en dl dd a IS roo cello e lO bela S hl td 508 MVR Port Mode ade 509 MYR Multicast VELAN a de eats 509 MVRiPort Ty persista a a ls ana 510 MVR Immediate Leave A aan 510 6 21 VOICE VEAN COMMANA sssi gaietan acia iii idea diia cinta callen ie aiiis 511 Voice VLAN CONQUE 511 Voice VLAN Mode iniaiaiai acia 512 Voice VIAN Discos e es ae cet Pate E o e o a e o 513 Voice VLAN A getm Enema ia a oi cio 513 VOICO VLAN Traffic ASS ticas 514 Voice VILANIQUIA dd 514 Voice VEAN QUI Delete coccion si da piece 515 Voice VEAN QUI Clear cocinan tadas 515 Voice VEAN OUD LOOKUP ata a dd 516 Voice VLAN Port Mode is 516 VOICE VLAN Secured 517 6 22 Loop Protect Command i as m enun ge annenin eda a ie 517 Loop Protect Configuratio spisie diia 517 LOOP M Protect Mode as 517 Loop Protect MO A rajas 518 Loop Protect SMULGOWM misine a A 518 Loop Protect Port Configuration ssia ikattar seueteweite tenes ites ea arena ia 519 Loop Protect Porl MOd6 oo lt a A A Aita 519 Loop Protect Port Action ii aaa 519 6 23 de Nd aaa ea cen a ar ook tees hide wah ae ec adee anda ses aaa cans c
292. ervice to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that
293. ess processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded e Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded e Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behavior at the egress side e Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or Not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between feature Conflicts due to hardware limitation 129 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Direct conflict between user modules e VLAN User AVLAN User is a module that uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN CLI Web SNMP This are reffered as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only ona singl
294. ess entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 97 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 4 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items a Port Configuration Configures port connection settings a Port Statistics Overview Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics a Port Thermal Protection Configures thermal protection settings a Port Thermal Protection Display thermal protection status Status a Port Statistics Detail Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics a SFP Information Display SFP information a Port Mirror Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 4 4 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears Port Configuration Port Port Description Link Speed Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power Current Configured Current Rx Current Tx Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control lt All gt lt All gt lt All gt Discard Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto Copper Auto Copper Discard JEJEJE Auto Copper Discard Auto Copper Discard Auto Copper Discard Auto Copper Discard Auto Copper Discard cH jE jE EE
295. esulted in errors while being sent to clients Receive form Server The number of packets received from server Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID Receive Bad Remote The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID ID Client Statistics Object Description Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers 67 e Receive form Client User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The number of received packets from server e Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option e Replace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option e Keep Agent Optin The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained e Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automaticall
296. et 30sec for server timeout IGS 10020MT gt security aaa timeout 30 Security AAA Deadtime Description Set or show server dead time Syntax Security AAA Deadtime lt dead_time gt Parameters lt dead_time gt Time that a server is considered dead if it doesn t answer a request 0 3600 seconds default Show server dead time configuration Default Setting 300 Example Set 1000sec for server dead time IGS 10020MT gt security aaa deadtime 1000 Security AAA RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt 443 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS authentication server configuration enable Enable RADIUS authentication server disable Disable RADIUS authentication server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external authentication server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1812 Example Set RADIUS authentication server configuration IGS 10020MT gt security aaa radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1812 Secu
297. et or show the port queue shaper mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Mode lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enable port queue shaper disable Disable port queue shaper default Show port queue shaper mode Default Setting disable Example Enable port queue shaper for all port amp queue IGS 10020MT gt qos Port QueueShaper Mode 1 10 0 7 enable 487 QoS Port QueueShaper Rate Description Set or show the port queue shaper rate Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Rate lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 lt bit_rate gt Rate in kilo bits per second 100 3300000 Default Setting 500kbps Example Set the port queue shaper rate in 1000 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt qos Port QueueShaper rate 1 10 0 7 1000 QoS Port QueueShaper Excess Description Set or show the port queue excess bandwidth mode Syntax QoS Port QueueShaper Excess lt port_list gt lt queue_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt queue_list gt Queue list or all default All queues 0 7 enable Enabl
298. f IGS 10020MT Description e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count Advanced Seitings Object The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid v
299. f the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overr
300. f the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 e DSCP Port Policies Configuration DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration applies e Policy ID The set of policies that shall apply for a given port The set of policies is selected by checkmarking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons Add New Policy click to add new policy Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 307 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 14 4 LLDP MED Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP MED neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP MED Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears The columns hold the following information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Local Port No LLDP MED neighbour information found Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 14 3 LLDP MED Neighbor Informa
301. field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file e IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value 222 e IP TTL User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Fragment Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes Pv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is
302. ge The MLD Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table The MLD Groups Informatino screen in Figure 4 8 15 appears MLD Snooping Groups Information Auto refresh l Refresh lt lt gt gt Start from VLAN 1 and group address ff00 with 20 entries per page Port Members faa vian 10 crowns 2 ao o r e o za No more entries No more entries Figure 4 8 15 MLD Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the MLD Group Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 181 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 13 MLDv2 Information Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown
303. ge applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Parameters Buttons Save Class QoS class 0 7 or Default DP Valid Drop Precedence Level can be 0 1 or Default DSCP Valid DSCP value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or Default Default means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE Click to save the configuration and move to main QCL page Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change 4 9 12 QoS Status This page shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch The QoS Control List Status screen in Figure 4 9 15 appears Combined x Auto refresh Resolve Conflict Refresh QoS Control List Status No entries Action QCE Frame Type Port Conflict Figure 4 9 15 QoS Control List Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF
304. gher layer protocol InDiscards The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol InUnknownProtos the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or un support protocol OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit OutNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit OutDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal OutErrors The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors OutQLen The length of the output packet queue in packets e Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Absolute Get the sample directly Delta Calculate the difference between samples default e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period e Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is
305. gher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 All means all ports will have one specific setting e Priority The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above All means all ports will have one specific setting 162 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Ser Click to set MSTx configuration Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 7 8 Port Status This page displays the STP CIST port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears STP Port Status CIST Role CIST State Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Non STP Forwarding Auto refresh C Figure 4 7 11 STP Port Status Page Screenshot 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 _ The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the ICST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort BackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort e CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port s
306. gregation Topology The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to
307. gress Port Policers A 500 Reset Figure 4 9 1 QoS Ingress Port Policers Page Screenshot Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port means selection all ports of Industrial Managed Switch e Rate Controls the rate for the policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps or fps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps or kfps e Unit The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Controls the unit of measure for the policer rate as kbps Mbps fps or kfps The default value is kbps All means all ports will have one specific setting e Flow Control If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 189 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 3 Port Classification This page allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports The Port Classification screen in Figure 4 9 2 appears QoS Ingress Port Classification SS lt All gt w lt All gt x lt All gt x lt All gt da 0 0 0 y gt lz x a Reset Figure 4 9 2
308. gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 Example Set 2048 frame size for port1 IGS 10020MT gt port maxframe 1 2048 358 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting disable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt port power 1 4 enable Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard 359 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example IGS 10020MT gt port excessive 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt up down Parameters lt port_list gt Port l
309. gt ipme state igmp 1 enable IPMC Querier Description Set or show the IPMC snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IPMC Querier mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD querier disable Disable MLD querier Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP querier for VLAN 1 IGS 10020MT gt ipme querier igmp 1 enable IPMC Fastleave Description Set or show the IPMC snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IPMC Fastleave mld igmp lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD 523 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable MLD fast leave disable Disable MLD fast leave default Show IPMC fast leave mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP fast leave for all port IGS 10020MT gt ipmc fastleave igmp 1 10 enable IPMC Throttling Description Set or show the IPMC port throttling status Syntax IPMC Throttling mld igmp lt port_list gt limit_group_number Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 0 No limit 1 10 Group learn limit default Show IPMC Port Throttling Default Setting Unlimit
310. he corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MDS is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv 6 instead of using a separate protocol 552 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them W
311. he node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 90 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 4 1 SNMPv3 Communities Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears SNMPv3 Community Configuration public private Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 3 3 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c commun
312. hen Miah een eras 494 Q0SDSCP Trust ata ta ita eet 495 QoS DSCP Classification Mode oooocccononcccnonocnnonononcnononnncnnno nn no non cn nano rn rre 495 QoS DSCP Egres ROMA aiii ds 496 QOS Stor UNICA e all sa 0 496 DO Merlin 497 QoS QCL Addict he 497 Q0S QCL Delete iii A Seat nee Shi nee ia 498 QOS OC E LOOKUP ciudada 499 QoS OCL Statuses nas cmeca osa tato he bees ca dl do hed alt he bras el do ooed whens heb cag nd Ae ce dhe bolas and 499 QoS QCL Refresh ii dl 500 6 16 Mirror COMMA d aa rr es se aaa a Taea aaea ra aaa aTe ccdaagent s stbcestoctassect duscastocuastececasderusatesteceeen 501 Mirror GonfiQurations secs diana 501 Mirror POM xs iieii a aa aa a a a teei 501 Mirror E o lE EEEE LETE E T A adan 502 6 17 Configuration Command coomicincnnnnnnnnnncr cc 503 Configuration Saves s ee At tada 503 Configuration LOA ii eke a de Sn eee ed Cea 503 6 18 Firmware COMmMan 22 3 ii riadas 504 Firmware Lodi aran 504 Firmware IPv6 Lodi A iia 504 Firmware O MAtION 2 2 2 EEA EEST ince sssccenapssecedesastsdedoseceeatnassatadsratntesneesdt shepuesdnsassecdecapusecenetsciecgee 504 Firmware Swap i805 San cae ots ie ve ad Me os ind ee ed 504 619 UPP COMMANA a A idad 505 16 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT UP TP Configura adios 505 UPRP Mode es cet e oh o e e A o e e an 505 URAR TTE teca eee ee ds e o dA rocas e ela cf e el a eo e ce O 506 UPnP Advertising DUration c ccceeeeneaes eceresednensusececapesecenssascders
313. henticated client and get network access even though they 240 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an I
314. hentication section contains links to the following main topics m IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control MAC Based Authentication m User Authentication Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwardi
315. her end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 TLV is an acronym for Type Length Value ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV 559 User s
316. his case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration Timeout ame seconds seconds Dead Time Time RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration 192 168 0 253 290000000 Figure 4 11 10 RADIUS Server Configuration Screenshot 266 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 Add New RADIUS Cleint on the Windows 2003 server 2 Internet Authentication Service File Action View Help e Om 6108 18 gt Internet Authentication Service Local RADIUS Clients E CATest 192 168 0 5 RADIUS iT Remote Acce New RADIUS Client Y Remote Acce 3 Connection R New view Refresh Export List Help Figure 4 11 11 Windows Server Add New RADIUS Client Setting 3 Assign the client IP address to the Industrial Managed Switch New RADIUS Client Xx Name and Address Type a friendly name and either an IP Address or DNS name for the client Friendly name 202 1 x Managed Switch Client address IP or DNS f 92 168 0 100 Verify lt Back Cancel Figure 4 11 12 Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting 267 User s Ma
317. hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Auto refresh i i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 284 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of DUT when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 8 appears DHCP Snooping Configuration Port Mode Configuration lt All gt Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Trusted Reset Figure 4 12 8 DHCP Snooping Configuration Screen Page Screenshot 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 0 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sou
318. ic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host This page provides IP Source Guard related configuration The IP Source Guard Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 10 appears IP Source Guard Configuration Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients lt All gt w lt All gt Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Disabled Unlimited Figure 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration Screen Page Screenshot EEE EEN ENEN ENEI 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 0 The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode of IP Source Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All Guard Configuration configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode Configuration and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port All means all ports will have one specific setting e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of
319. ication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States 231 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication server Authentication server RADIUS Server TACACS Server internet A ANIOS Intran PLANET 802 1X aware Switch Figure 4 11 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client a
320. idden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the 243 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading 0 s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have tempo
321. ide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons 549 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instea
322. ification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 551 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity in the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with t
323. iguration name A text string up to 32 characters long Use quotes to embed spaces in name lt integer gt Integer value Default Setting Configuration name MAC address Configuration rev 0 Example Set MSTP configuration name and revision IGS 10020MT gt stp cname 9f_IGS 10020MT 1 STP BPDU Filter Description Set or show edge port BPDU Filtering Syntax STP bpduFilter enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Filtering for Edge ports 449 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting Disable Example Set edge port BPDU filtering IGS 10020MT gt stp bpdufilter enable STP BPDU Guard Description Set or show edge port BPDU Guard Syntax STP bpduGuard enable disable Parameters enable disable enable or disable BPDU Guard for Edge ports Default Setting Disable Example Set edge port BPDU guard IGS 10020MT gt stp bpduguard enable STP Recovery Description Set or show edge port error recovery timeout Syntax STP recovery lt timeout gt Parameters lt timeout gt Time before error disabled ports are reenabled 30 86400 seconds 0 disables default Show recovery timeout 450 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting Disable Example Set STP recovery value in 30 sec IGS 10020MT gt stp recovery 30 STP Status Description Show STP Bridge status Syntax STP Status lt msti gt lt po
324. igure 4 8 17 appears MVR Configurations MVR Mode Disabled v VLAN Interface Setting Role I Inactive S Source R Receiver Delete MVR VID MVR Name Mode Tagging Priority LLQI Interface Channel Setting Delete Dynamic 5 Tagged 0 5 Pot 12345 6 7 10 8 9 re QA E E immediate Leave Setting Port Immediate Leave Disabled y 2 Disabled 7 3 Disabled 4 Disabled y 5 Disabled y 6 Disabled w 7 Disabled y 8 Disabled x 9 Disabled y 10 Disabled y Reset Figure 4 8 17 MVR Configuration Page Screenshot 183 The page includes the following fields Object User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP MLD Snooping It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group table is full e Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e MVR VID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID Be Caution MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management VLAN ports e MVR Name MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 32 MVR VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers When the optional MVR VLAN name is given it
325. igures the MAC based VLAN entries Displaies MAC based VLAN entries Configures the IP Subnet based VLAN entries Configures the protocol based VLAN entries Displaies the protocol based VLAN entries 117 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 li
326. ikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System lt allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an ac
327. ilable MAC addresses e Action The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and 276 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the stack or elect a new masterthe switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the stackswitch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken e State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for
328. iltering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port10 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt vlan ingressfilter 10 enable VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased Port Based VLAN Mode dotiq 802 1Q VLAN Mode default Show VLAN Mode Default Setting IEEE 802 1Q 369 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set VLAN mode in port base IGS 10020MT gt vlan mode portbased VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged default Show VLAN link type Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for port2 IGS 10020MT gt vlan linktype 2 tagged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN QinQ lt port_list gt disable man customer 370 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode default Show VLAN QinQ Mode Example Set port2 in man port IGS 10020MT gt vlan
329. in Figure 4 9 13 appears QoS Control List Configuration QCE Port Frame Type SMAC DMAC VID PCP ce port Frame Type smac omac vio pco perk Feo DSCP Figure 4 9 13 QoS Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCE Indicates the index of QCE e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address i e first three octet byte of MAC address e DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any e VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any e PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
330. in MAC based VLAN list IGS 10020MT gt vel macvlan del 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 VCL Stasus Description Show VCL MAC based VLAN users configuration Syntax VCL Status combined static nas all Parameters combined static nas all VCL User VCL Protocol based VLAN Add Ethernet II Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN Ethernet l protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Eth2 lt ether_type gt arpliplipxlat lt group_id gt 531 Parameters lt ether_type gt arp ip ipx at Ether Type 0x0600 OxFFFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add SNAP Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN SNAP protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Snap lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h lt pid gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt oui gt rfc_1042 snap_8021h OUI value Hexadecimal 00 00 00 to FF FF FF User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lt pid gt PID value Ox0 OxFFFF If OUI is 00 00 00 valid range of PID is from 0x0600 OxFFFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Add LLC Description Add VCL protocol based VLAN LLC protocol to group mapping Syntax VCL ProtoVlan Protocol Add Llc lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt group_id gt Parameters lt dsap gt DSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt ssap gt SSAP value 0x00 0xFF lt group_id gt Protocol group ID VCL Protocol based VLAN Delete Ethernet ll Description
331. information into the header of a packet 118 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header HM 802 10 VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Data FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source add
332. ins the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Industrial Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics E Requirements a Management Access Overview a Remote Telnet Access E Web Management Access a SNMP Access a Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements a Workstations of subscribers running Windows XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 MAC OS X Linux Fedora Ubuntu or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols a Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card E Ethernet Port connect e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors e Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in go It is recommended to use Internet Explore 7 0 or above to access Industrial Managed Switch Note 42 3 2 Management Access Overview User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The Industrial Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E Remote Telnet Interface a Web browser Interface E An external SNMP based network management application The Remote Telnet and Web browser interface support are embedded in
333. int Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class II classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification 2 3 4 Extended Power via MDI PSE 5 Extended Power via MDI PD 6 Inventory 309 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 7 Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The poosible application types are shown below Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are ty
334. invalid CRC e Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Buttons Fl Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 17 9 RMON History Status This page provides an overview of RMON History entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the History table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the History table screen in Figure 4 17 9 appears RMON History Overview Auto refresh O Start from Control Index and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page History Sample Sample Broad Multi CRC Under Over ee Start Drop Octets Pkts ace ta e Eje ES Frag Jabb Coll Utilization No more entries Figure 4 17 9 RMON history overview page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Indicates the index of History control entry e Sample Index Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry
335. ion MAC type unicast multicast broadcast any Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type 0x600 OxFFFF or any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and 0x86DD IPv6 LLC keyword Destination Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any Source Service Access Point 0x00 OxFF or any LLC control 0x00 OxFF or any SNAP keyword Protocol ID EtherType or any IPv4 keyowrd IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or any Source IP address a b c d n or any DSCP 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 or any specific range IPv4 frame fragmented yes nojany Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range Dest TCP UDP port 0 65535 or any specific or port range IPv6 keyowrd IPv6 source address a b c d n or any 32 LS bits QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Level dp 0 1 default basic classification lt classified_dscp gt DSCP dscp 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE entry from QoS Control list Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qce_id gt 498 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Default Setting disable Example Enable multicast storm control in 2fps IGS 10020MT gt QoS Storm multicast enable 2 QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QoS Control List Syntax QoS QCL Lookup lt qce_id gt Parameters
336. ion policy When enable DHCP relay Policy information mode operation if agent receive a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information It will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP relay information operation mode enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Keep Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it Drop Drop the package when receive a DHCP message that already contains relay information 66 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 9 DHCP Relay Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP relay The DHCP Relay Statistics screen in Figure 4 2 12 appears Transmit to Server Transmit Error Receive from Server DHCP Relay Statistics Server Statistics Receive Bad Remote ID Receive Bad Circuit ID Receive Missing Remote ID Receive Missing Agent Option Receive Missing Circuit ID The page includes the following fields Auto Refresh Refresh Clear Figure 4 2 12 DHCP Relay Statistics Page Screenshot Server Statistics Object Description Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server Transmit Error The number of packets that r
337. is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port e Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps e Port Shaper Unit Buttons Save Click to save changes Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page 4 9 6 Port Tag Remarking This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports The Port Tag Remarking screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified Classified ll 2 3 4 5 6 Zz 8 3 10 Figure 4 9 7 QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 6 1 e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP
338. is page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership screen in Figure 4 6 3 appears VLAN Membership Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members IN o Delete ViANTD vinnem hells A 7 deat MIMI A Add New VLAN Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Name Indicates the name of the VLAN Maximum length of the VLAN Name String is 32 VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Add New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter presen
339. ist or all default All ports lt command gt _ The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics 0 7 Show priority statistics default Show all port statistics up Show ports which are up down Show ports which are down default Show all ports Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 360 Port SFP Description Show SFP port information Syntax Port SFP lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show SFP information for port21 24 IGS 10020MT gt port sfp Port Type Wave Length nm Distance m 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 10 1000Base LX 1000 Base 1310 10000 361 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 4 MAC Address Table Command Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show Mac address state Description Add MAC address table entry 362 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt
340. ity Switch SNMP Trap Security Name lt security_name gt Parameters lt security_name gt A string representing the security name for a principal default Show SNMP trap security name The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 401 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set the SNMP trap security name IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp trap security name 12345678 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID Description Set or show SNMPv3 local engine ID Syntax Security Switch SNMP Engine ID lt engineid gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all ffH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string Default Setting 800007e5017f000001 Example Set 800007e5017f000002 for SNMPv3 local engine ID IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp engine id 800007e5017f000002 Security Switch SNMP Community Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 community entry The entry index key is lt community gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Add lt community gt lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt Parameters lt community gt Community string lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask 402 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Add SNMPv3 community entry Security Switch SNMP Community Delete Description Delete SNMPv3 commun
341. ity entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Delete lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Delete SNMPv3 community entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp community delete 3 Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 community entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP Community Lookup lt index gt Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 community entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp community lookup Source IP Source Mask 192 168 0 20 255 255 255 0 403 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 private Number of entries 2 Security Switch SNMP User Add Description Add SNMPv3 user entry The entry index key are lt engineid gt and lt user_name gt and it doesn t allow modify Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Add lt engineid gt lt user_name gt MD5 SHA lt auth_password gt DES lt priv_password gt Parameters lt engineid gt Engine ID the format may not be all zeros or all fFH and is restricted to 5 32 octet string lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 md5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol The allowed length is 8 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters
342. ity string e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 91 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 3 4 2 SNMPv3 Users Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPv3 User Configuration Delet Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Sonis Level Protocol Password Protocol Password 800007e5017f000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM fo
343. ived or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 3 appears Remote IP Ping Test i L VVV Vl By VB Vl Bl 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 Figure 4 15 3 Remote IP Ping Test Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings e Remote IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes e Result Display the ping result Buttons Click to start ping process Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Clear F f Cta Clears the local counters All counters including global counters are cleared upon reboot 320 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 15 4 Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps m
344. iver Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports source Enable source mode receiver Disable receiver mode default Show MVR port type Default Setting receive Example Set source type for MVR port type of port 1 IGS 10020MT gt mvr port type 1 source MVR Immediate Leave Description Set or show MVR port state about immediate leave Syntax MVR Immediate Leave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Immediate leave mode disable Disable Immediate leave mode default Show MVR Immediate leave mode Default Setting disable 510 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable MVR port state about immediate leave for port 1 IGS 10020MT gt mvr immediate leave 1 enable 6 21 Voice VLAN Command Voice VLAN Configuration Description Show Voice VLAN configuration Syntax Voice VLAN Configuration Example Show Voice VLAN configuration IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan configuration V oice VLAN Configuration Disabled Voice VLAN VLAN ID 1000 Voice VLAN Age Time seconds 86400 Voice VLAN Traffic Class iT Voice VLAN OUI Table PLANET phones Cisco phones H3C phones Philips and NEC AG phones Pingtel phones Polycom phones 3Com phones 511 00 01 E3 Siemens AG phones Voice VLAN Port Configuration Port Mode Security Disabled Disabled Di
345. l Buckets Suenos Ada New Enty Figure 4 17 7 RMON history configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds e Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 e Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON Buttons Add New Enty Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 331 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 17 8 RMON History Detail This page provides an detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 17 8 appears Detailed RMON History ID i Auto refresh C SampleStart Drops Octets Pkts Broadcast Multicast CRC Alignment Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabber Collisions Utilization f cc 000 go Figure 4 17 8 R
346. l i 1 i PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 i PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 1 1 Untagged Untagged Tagged i Untagged Untagged Tagged j 1 1 H VLAN 2 l VLAN 3 N 3 lt i F Figure 4 6 8 Two Separate VLAN Diagram VLAN Group 1 1 Port 7 Port 10 N A VLAN Group 2 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 VLAN Group 3 3 Port 4 Port 5 Port 6 Table 4 1 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follow E Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 1 the Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will received the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 received no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 134 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT a Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 5 While PC 3 transmit a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 enters Port 3 PC 1 and PC 2 will received the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 6 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away it tag becoming an untagged packet a Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmit an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will received the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away it tag becomi
347. l is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the ident
348. licy Value User s Manual of IGS 10020MT When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy value The allowed range is 0 to 255 e Policy Bitmask When Specific is selected for the policy filter you can enter a specific policy bitmask The allowed range is 0x0 to Oxff e Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE These frame types are mutually exclusive Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE The IEEE 802 3 describes the value of Length Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal equal to 0600 hexadecimal ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE Notice the ARP frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Notice the IPv4 frames won t match the ACE with ethernet type e Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped e Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 16 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled e EVC Policer Select whether EVC policer is enabled or disabled The default value is Disabled e EVC Policer ID e Port Redirect Select which EVC policer ID to apply on this ACE The allowed values are Dis
349. lity is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus It is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services 558 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the ot
350. ll default All ports enable Enable Loop Protection disable Disable Loop Protection Loop Protect Port Action Description Set or show the Loop Protection port action Syntax Loop Protect Port Action lt port_list gt shutdown shut_log log Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports shutdown Shutdown the port shut_log Shutdown the port and Log event log Only Log the event 519 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 23 IPMC Command IPMC Configuration Description Show IPMC snooping configuration Syntax IPMC Configuration mld igmp Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP IPMC Mode Description Set or show the IPMC snooping mode Syntax IPMC Mode mld igmp enable disable Parameters mldligmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC snooping disable Disable IPMC snooping default Show global IPMC snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt ipmc mode igmp enable IPMC Flooding Description Set or show the IPMC unregistered addresses flooding operation User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax IPMC Flooding mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC flooding disable Disable IPMC flooding default Show global IPMC floodi
351. ll default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 Default Setting 1 Example Set ACL policy 2 for port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network acl policy 1 2 426 Security Network ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax Security Network ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt rate_unit gt lt rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 16 default All rate limiters lt rate_unit gt IP flags pps kbps default pss User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lt rate gt Rate in pps 0 100 or kbps 0 100 2 100 3 100 1000000 Default Setting 1 Example Set rate limit value in 100 for port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network acl rate 1 100 Security Network ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to all ports If the Port keyword is used the rule applies to the specified port only If the Policy keyword is used the rule applies to all port
352. lock should be in the range between 12 24 AWG 2 Performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tighten the wire clamp screws Ensure the power is OFF to prevent to get an electric shock 2 4 Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact The fault alarm contacts are in the middle 3 amp 4 of the terminal block connector as the picture shows below Inserting the wires the Industrial Managed Switch will detect the fault status of the power failure or port link failure available for managed model The following illustration shows an application example for wiring the fault alarm contacts Insert the wires into the fault alarm contacts 37 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range between 12 24 AWG 2 Performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tighten the wire clamp screws Ensure the power is OFF to prevent to get an electric shock 2 5 Cabling 10 100 1000Base T and 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX All 10 100 1000Base T ports come with Auto Negotiation capability They automatically support 1000Base T 100Base TX and 10Base T networks Users only need to plug a working network device into one of the 10 100 1000Base T ports and then turn on the Industrial Managed Switch The port will automatically runs in 10Mbps 20Mbps 100Mbps or 200Mbps and 1000Mbps or 2000Mbps after the negotiation with the connected device The Industrial Managed S
353. lt JH SSSR SB JH SSS SSRABS lt 200 300a0N a SHH E E E 8 SEE 3 RAYA El py Save Reset Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration Page Screenshot 298 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval e Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds e Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 secon
354. lues default Use default PCP DEI values mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level default Show port tag remarking mode Default Setting classified Example Set the port tag remarking mode in mapped IGS 10020MT gt qos Port TagRemarking Mode 1 10 mapped QoS Port TagRemarking PCP Description Set or show the default PCP This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking PCP lt port_list gt lt pcp gt 490 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt pcp gt Priority Code Point 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default PCP in 1 IGS 10020MT gt qos Port TagRemarking PCP 1 10 1 QoS Port TagRemarking DEI Description Set or show the default DEI This value is used when port tag remarking mode is set to default Syntax QoS Port TagRemarking DEI lt port_list gt lt dei gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt dei gt Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 Default Setting 0 Example Set the default EDI in 1 IGS 10020MT gt qos Port TagRemarking EDI 1 10 1 QoS Port TagRemarking Map Description Set or show the port tag remarking map This map is used when port tag remarking mode is set to mapped and the purpose is to translate the classified QoS class 0 7 and DP level 0 1 to PCP and DEI
355. matically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 150 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT a _ LAN 1 gt Port cost 200 000 A vor Bridge ID 15 Port 2 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B E c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 _ gt A LAN 3 WS Figure 4 7 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used A C Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port c Designated Bridge A LAN 2 gt A AN3 ___ gt Figure 4 7 3 After Applying the STA Rules 151 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used bu
356. mber port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port All means all ports will have one specific setting e Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port e Throtting The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 8 9 MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 12 appears MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from WLAN 1 with 120 entries per page Figure 4 8 12 IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e MLD Snooping Enable Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 64 VLANs can be selected e MLD Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the V
357. mbined static nas mvr voice_vlan mstp all conflicts Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports combined combined VLAN Users configuration static static port configuration nas NAS port configuration mvr MVR port configuration voice_vlan Voice VLAN port configuration mstp MSTP port configuration all All VLAN Users configuration default combined VLAN Users configuration Default Setting Promiscous Example Show VLAN configuration of port10 IGS 10020MT gt status 1 Port VLAN User PortType PVID Frame Type Ing Filter Tx Tag 376 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Static Unaware Disabled Untag This 1 NAS Voice VLAN Combined Unaware Disabled Untag This 1 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Command PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show private VLAN configuration IGS 10020MT gt pvlan configuration Private VLAN Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 377 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled PVLANID Ports PVLAN Add Description Add or modify Private VLAN entry Syntax PVLAN Add lt pvlan_id gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt pvlan_id gt Private VLAN ID The allowed range for a Private VL
358. me is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Buttons e Restart Refresh Save Click to refresh the page Click to save changes Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the
359. multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN video_conferencing Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services streaming_video Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type video_ signaling Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media tagged The device is using tagged frames unragged The device is using untagged frames lt vlan_id gt VLAN id lt I2_priority gt This field may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 lt dscp gt This field shall contain the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 5 This 6 bit field may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 LLDPMED Port Policy Description Set or show LLDP MED port polcies Syntax LLDPMED port policies lt port_list gt lt policy_list gt
360. n limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP 557 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master swit
361. nd notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client 232 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication
362. nformation This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration IPv6 Configuration Users Configuration Privilege Levels NTP Configuration UPnP DHCP Relay DHCP Relay Statistics CPU Load System Log Detailed Log Remote Syslog SMTP Configuration EEE Power Reduction Thermal Protection Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Backup Configuration Upload Image Select Factory Default System Reboot The switch system information is provided here Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser This page provides an overview of the privilege levels Configure NTP on this page Configure UPnP on this page Configure DHCP Relay on this page This page provides statistics for DHCP relay This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The switch system log information is provided here The switch system detailed log information is provided here Configure remote syslog on this page Configure SMTP function on this page Configuration energy efficient ethernet power reduction on this page Configure thermal protection on this page This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server You
363. ng User Name Privilege admin 15 Example Show users configuration IGS 10020MT gt security switch user configuration Users Configuration Security Switch User Add Description Add or modify users entry 380 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax Security Switch Users Add lt user_name gt lt password gt lt privilege_level gt Parameters lt user_name gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores lt password gt The password for this user name The allowed string length is 0 32 Use clear or as null string lt privilege_level gt User privilege level 1 15 Example Add new user username test password test amp privilege 10 IGS 10020MT gt security switch users add test test 10 Security Switch User Delete Description Delete users entry Syntax Security Switch Users Delete lt user_name gt Parameters lt user_names gt A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 32 The valid user name is a combination of letters numbers and underscores Example Delete test account IGS 10020MT gt security switch users delete user Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration Description Show privilege configuration Syntax Security Switch Privileg
364. ng an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will keep as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 eA At this example VLAN Group 1 just set as default VLAN but only focus on VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 traffic flow Note Setup steps 1 Create VLAN Group Set VLAN Group 1 Default VLAN with VID VLAN ID 1 Add two VLANs VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 VLAN Group 2 with VID 2 VLAN Group 3 with VID 3 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN 3 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN 1 All other ports Port 7 Port 24 3 Remove VLAN Member for VLAN 1 Remember to remove the Port 1 Port 6 from VLAN 1 membership since the Port 1 Port 6 had be assigned to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 Port Members a ESAS CS a OB DAD OE Ba Ya 1a va a HA Figure 4 6 9 Add new VLAN group assign VLAN members for VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 and remove specify ports from VLAN 1 member 135 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT It s import to remove the VLAN members from VLAN 1 configuration Or the ports would become E Ly overlap setting About the overlapped VLAN configuration see next VLAN configure sample Note 4 Assign PVID for each port Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 PVID 3 Port 7 Port 24 PVID 1 5 Enable VLAN Tag for specific ports Link Type Port 3 VLAN 2 and Port 6 VLAN 3 The Per Port VLAN configuration in Figure 4 6 10 appears
365. ng fields Object Description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 63 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted means to select all ports of Industrial Managed Switch 199 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e QoS Class The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole DSCP values Drop Precedence Level 0 1 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 9 9 DSCP Translation This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress The DSCP Translation screen in Figure 4 9 11 appears DSCP Translation z lt All gt lt All gt x lt All gt 0 BE 0 BE x O 0 BE 0 BE fx 1 1 El 1 1 El 2 2 2 2 3 3 Ix OF 3 mm 3 El 4 4 x 4 4 5 5 Iz 5 5 6 6 z 6 z 6 7 7 y 7 7 z 8 CS1 8 CS1 w 8 CS1 w 8 CS1 x 9 9 Ix 9 x 9 x 10 AF11 10 AF11 x 10 AF11 10 AF11 x 11 11 EA 11 11 EA 12 AF12 12 AF12 E 12 AF12 12 AF12 x 13 13 13 13 14 AF13 14 AF13 E 14 AF1
366. ng identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The name of None is reserved The allowed string length is 1 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 lt auth_password gt A string identifying the authentication pass phrase lt priv_password gt A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 40 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Example Delete SNMPv3 user entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp user changekey 800007e5017f000003 admin_snmpv3 87654321 12345678 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup Description Lookup SNMPv3 user entry Syntax Security Switch SNMP User Lookup lt index gt 405 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt index gt entry index 1 64 Example Lookup SNMPv3 user entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp user lookup Auth Priv Auth Priv MD5 DES Number of entries 1 Security Switch SNMP Group Add Description Add or modify SNMPv3 group entry The entry index key are lt security_model gt and lt security_name gt Syntax Security Switch SNMP Group Add lt security_model gt lt security_name gt lt group_name gt Parameters lt security_model gt v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM lt security_name gt A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string l
367. ng mode Default Setting enable Example Enable IGMP flooding IGS 10020MT gt ipme flooding igmp enable IPMC Leave Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Leave Proxy Syntax IPMC Leave Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Leave Proxy disable Disable IPMC Leave Proxy default Show global IPMC Leave Proxy mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP Leave Proxy IGS 10020MT gt ipme leave proxy igmp enable 521 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IPMC Proxy Description Set or show the mode of IPMC Proxy Syntax IPMC Proxy mld igmp enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP enable Enable IPMC Proxy disable Disable IPMC Proxy default Show global IPMC Proxy mode Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP Proxy IGS 10020MT gt ipme proxy igmp enable IPMC State Description Set or show the IPMC snooping state for VLAN Syntax IPMC State mld igmp lt vid gt enable disable Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs enable Enable MLD snooping disable Disable MLD snooping 522 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable Example Enable IGMP snooping state for VLAN 1 IGS 10020MT
368. ng this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party
369. nicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated a Note 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN tag unaware The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are 3 The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items VLAN Basic Information VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Memberships VLAN Membership Status VLAN Port Status Private VLAN Port Isolation MAC based VLAN MAC based VLAN Status IP Subnet based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Protocol based VLAN Membership Displaies VLAN information Enable VLAN group Configures the VLAN membership Display VLAN membership status Display VLAN port status Creates removes primary or community VLANs Enable disable port isolation on port Conf
370. nk to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features ia Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard a Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs E End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices E Priority tagging M EEE 802 10 Standard IEEE 802 10 tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging m The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN
371. nning After the diagnostics are finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are available Coupling between cable pairs m Cable pair termination m Cable Length 317 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 15 1 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press Start 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears ICMP Ping Ping Length Length 56 Ping Count Ping Count Ping Interval Ping Interval Start Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes e Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times e Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds ga Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you had setup the Note correct gateway IP address Button Star Click to start transmitting ICMP packets New Ping Click to re start diagnostics with PING 318 4 15 2 IPv6 Ping User
372. nning of the command disable The Guest VLAN can only be entered if no EAPOL frames have been received on a port for the lifetime of the port enable The Guest VLAN can be entered even if an EAPOL frame has been received during the lifetime of the port default Show current setting Default Setting disable 423 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable NAS guest VLAN IGS 10020MT gt security network nas guest_vlan enable Security Network NAS Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process Syntax Security Network NAS Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately Example Start NAS authentication now for port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network nas authenticate 1 now Security Network NAS Statistics Description Show or clear 802 1X statistics Syntax Security Network NAS Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show Backend Server statistics default Show all statistics Example Show 802 1X statistics in port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network nas statistics 1 424 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Port 1 EAPOL Statistics Rx Total 0 TxTotal Rx Response ld 0 Tx Request ld O Tx Request
373. not The default setting is Auto e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets 113 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 5 3 LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Key Last Changed Local Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Auto Refresh CO Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Automatic refresh occurs every 3
374. ntries Cd No Group entries Add New Entry Reset Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 6 21 Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh i l Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page imm
375. nual of IGS 10020MT 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Industrial Managed Switch New RADIUS Client RADIUS Standard El Figure 4 11 13 Windows Server RADIUS Server Setting 268 5 6 t Security Shortcut to 2 Active Directory Domains and Trusts Configurati Network Administrator User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration RADIUS RADIUS Guest Admin State Assigned Assigned VLAN Port State QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled Enabled lt Configure All gt sy Windows Explorer Port based 802 1X Y O O O LE Reauthenticate Reinitalize Porttased 8021X O O a Reauthenticate Reinitaliz Figure 4 11 14 802 1x Port Configuration Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then as ig Active Directory Sites and Services and Computers S Cluster Administrator er My Cor GS Component Services A a Computer Management Control 3 Configure Your Server Wizard EH Data Sources ODBC Hg Adminis fe Distributed File System A 3 Ka Printers 1 ONS Y Paint e HyperTerminal 20 Windows Catalog Ethereal Y Windows Update Licensing e an Accessories f Manage Your Server Internet Explor Startu
376. ny count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records E Event A list of all events generated by RMON Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 17 1 RMON Alarm Configuration Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 1 appears RMON Alarm Configuration Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling EEN Figure 4 17 1 RMON Alarm configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2431 1 e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are InOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters InUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer 324 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT protocol InNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a hi
377. o E oO a o a o a o o E O E O E O lomo 1 Ze 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 EN O E O E OO E CO _ Auto refresh C Figure 4 5 7 LACP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh t Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Car Clears the counters for all ports 116 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview User s Manual of IGS 10020MT A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently commu
378. o a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbours table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbours table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbours table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbours table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbour devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets removed when the hold time is exceeded Port Description Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted System Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted System Description Optional TLV When checked
379. o applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy 306 e Tag User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 e L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use o
380. o the VLANs 138 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 10 3 Port Isolate The diagram shows how the Managed Switch handles isolate and promiscuous ports and the each PCs are not able to access each other PCs of each isolate port But they all need to access with the same server AP Printer The screen in Figure 4 6 14 appears This section will show you how to configure the port for the server that could be accessed by each isolate port Promiscuous Public Servers Pi or tiscuous Isolate VLAN 1 Private VLAN VLAN 2 Private VLAN Figure 4 6 14 The Port Isolate VLAN Diagram Setup steps 1 Assign Port Mode Set Port 1 Port 4 in Isolate port Set Port5 and Port 6 in Promiscuous port The screen in Figure 4 6 15 appears Port Number 111 213 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 10 OOOOO0 Figure 4 6 15 The Configuration of Isolate and Promiscuous Port 2 Assign VLAN Member VLAN 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 5 and Port 3 VLAN 2 Port 3 Port 6 The screen in Figure 4 6 16 appears Port Members a Delete Pvn m 2 3 4 5 6 7 e O 9 YY V Naya 2 alal a a A yo d lA Figure 4 6 16 Private VLAN Port Setting 139 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 11 MAC based VLAN The MAC based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries The MAC based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 17 appea
381. often it or they should receive a SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 64 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT z My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help E Back y wi ya Search Key Folders Address my Network Places Network Tasks 2 Add a network place a View network connections A Set up a wireless network For a home or small office Y Search Active Directory a Hide icons For networked UPnP devices Print Server Print Server 1 cd on Enm esther RDM HPS000 RDM HPLI1320 Other Places E Desktop Entire Network i My Computer G My Documents ey Printers and Faxes enm on 10 1 1 20 enmg on File ENM_Public on 10 1 1 20 ENM_Public on file Details Fae on 10 1 1 26 FAE on planet m FAE_Files on 10 1 1 26 fileMKT_Public on file da MELIA Figure 4 2 10 UPnP Devices shows on Windo
382. ol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 End IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also used a following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP 390 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Example Add access management list from 2001 0001 to 2001 0100 via web interface IGS 10020MT gt security switch access add 2001 0001 2001 0100 web Security Switch Access Delete Description Delete access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Delete lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Delete access management ID 1 IGS 10020MT gt security switch access delete 1 Security Switch Access Lookup Description Lookup access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access L
383. om the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Es Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Note Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP Asimple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will auto
384. on of the Industrial Managed Switch 22 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port E s8 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 copper M 2 100 1000Base X mini GBIC SFP slots SFP type auto detection gt Industrial Case Installation E IP30 Aluminum case protection E CODIN Rail and Wall Mount Design E Redundant Power Design 12 to 48V DC redundant power with polarity reverse protect function AC 24V power adapter acceptable E Supports EFT protection 6000 VDC for power line E Supports 6000 VDC Ethernet ESD protection Ms 40 to 75 Degree C operation temperature gt Layer 2 Features User s Manual of IGS 10020MT m Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex m High performance of Store and Forward architecture and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Storm Control support Multicast Unknown Unicast Support VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4095 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Protocol based VLAN MAC based VLAN Voice VLAN E Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol BPDU Guard Support Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 5 trunk groups
385. oncnn corn cnnn nn nn rr naar nara nn cnn rre 434 Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode cooocccccoccccconoccccnononcnononnncnnnoncnn nono nn oran nn nano rn cnn 434 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode ooooocoonoccccnococcnononcccnononcnonononcnn nono nc nano nr rr naar nr 435 Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics ooooononnccnonnnnnnnoccccnnnonnncnonannnn nono ncn nn nn rr nano rca rra 435 Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration ooooccccnnnninnnoccccnononcnonononcnnnonncnnn nn nn rr naar nn rra rra 436 Security Network IP Source Guard Mode ooooocccccoccccconoccnonononcnononnncnnnonnn crono cnn ran n nn rre rr rra ran rre rr 436 Security Network IP Source Guard Port Mode oooococoonoccccconoccnononcnonononcnnnnnnn non non cnn nao ttti kanterna atun nnn rre 437 Security Network IP Source Guard Limit ooooocccnnnncccnnnoccccnonancnonononcnononnnnnono cnn aiaia tida a aada dei eaae iaia iiaae 437 Security Network IP Source Guard Entry oocooocccncocccccononcnonononcnononcnonnnonnnnnnnn cnn rn n nn nan rra rre rra 438 Security Network IP Source Guard StatuUS ooooocononcccnnnoccccnononnnononcncnnn cnn nnnnn cnn e rr rra 438 Security Network ARP Inspection Configurati0N ooononcccnnnnnnnnoccccnnnonnncnonannnnnnrn cn nono nr rr nano rca 439 Security Network ARP Inspection Mode oocooocccccococccononcncnononcnononoconnno nn nc nono rca narran rra rre rr 439 Security Network ARP Inspection Port Mode ococccccnnoccccnono
386. onds and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation e IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 e DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation e DNS Proxy Buttons Save Click to save changes When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 56 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Renew Click to renew DHCP Client This button is only available if DHCP Client is enabled 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration The screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears IPv6 Configuration 192 168 0 100 Link Local Address fe80 230 4ffffe00 a001 96 Reset Figure 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration Page Screenshot
387. onnected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 544 ACE ACL User s Manual of IGS 10020MT APPENDEX B GLOSSARY ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized wa
388. ons Auto refresh El Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate ke Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 334 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 17 10 RMON Statistics Configuration Configure RMON Statistics table on this page The entry index key is ID screen in Figure 4 17 10 appears RMON Statistics Configuration Dette 10 ata Source Figure 4 17 10 RMON Statistics Configuration Page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new community entry Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 335 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 17 11 RMON Statistics Detail This page provides an Detail of a specific RMON statistics entry screen in Figure 4 17 11 appears Detailed RMON St
389. ookup lt access_id gt Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 Example Lookup access management entry IGS 10020MT gt security switch access lookup 1 391 Security Switch Access Clear Description Clear access management entry Syntax Security Switch Access Clear Example Clear access management entry User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt security switch access clear Security Switch Access Statistics Description Show or clear access management statistics Syntax Security Switch Access Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear access management statistics Example Show access management statistics IGS 10020MT gt security switch access statistics Access Management Siatistics Receive Receive Receive 0 0 0 0 Receive 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 Receive 392 Discard Discard Discard Discard Discard User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch SNMP Configuration Description Show SNMP configuration Syntax Security Switch SNMP Configuration Security Switch SNMP Mode Description Set or show the SNMP mode Syntax Security Switch SNMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SNMP disable Disable SNMP default Show SNMP mode Default Setting enable Example Disable SNMP mode IGS 10020MT gt security switch snmp mode disable Security Switch SNMP Version Description Set or show the
390. oonnnnccnnococnnoccccnononnncnonannnn nono ncnn ttunttun At rra 424 Security Network ACL Configuration omciciniiin Li a 425 Security Network ACL ACtiON vivio ios 425 Security Network ACL Policy c 2 sccssgccsessetereesnsteeadvatephestuenes redada 426 Security Network AGle Rate fic asize cies atada li Mi eatadash eats Ue Adi Eae aeiae 427 12 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Network ACL Add viii d NEEE Tei aiie 427 Security Network ACL Delete scrani ie cias 429 Sec rity Network ACL Lookup acicate ais 429 Security Network ACL Clear eeaeee r eee ekar aena Eede Erase dA E Ea rra EaR aer ASt ade PAPAA nater AE Eda EAE rr 430 Security Network ACL Status 0 o 430 Security Network DHCP Relay Configurati0N oooocccnnncccnnnoccnononcccnononcnnnono cnn n nono nnnn no rn r rra rn rn 430 Security Network DHCP Relay Mode oooooccccococccccocccccononcncnononcnononc nc canon o rr rra nn rn nn rre 431 Security Network DHCP Relay Server ooccincoccconocccccononcncnonononononcnnnn nn nn crono cnn ran n nn rana 432 Security Network DHCP Relay Information Mode ooocccccnnncccnnoccccnononcnonon nono nono ncnn no nn rr naar rra 432 Security Network DHCP Relay Information PoOliCY ooooocononnnnnnccccnnnocccnnononnnnnoncccnnnoncnc non narran rra 433 Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics ooononcccnnnoniccnnnoccnnnonccnnononnncnonannnnnnrnnnn nan nr urud cnn nn 433 Security Network DHCP Snooping ConfiguratiON oooocccnnnnnnnnoccccnnnonnnonon
391. ork users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions a Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree a Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used E The unique switch identifier E The path cost to the root associated with each switch port E The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information a The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port E The port identifier of the transmitting port 146 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The switch sends BPDUs to communica
392. orks by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol For maximizing power savings the circuit isn t started at once transmit data is ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data is ready to be transmitted For not introducing a large delay in case that data less then 3000 bytes shall be transmitted data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time EEE works for ports in auto negotiation mode where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100Mbps full duplex mode The EEE Power Reduction screen in Figure 4 2 18 appears EEE Configuration EEE Urgent Queues as Port Enabled 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E o e l EJ
393. ormation policy Default Setting replace Example Keep the original relay information when receive a DHCP message that already contains it IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp relay information policy keep Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP relay statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Relay Statistics clear Parameters clear Clear DHCP relay statistics 433 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Show DHCP relay statistics IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp relay statistics Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Description Show DHCP snooping configuration Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Configuration Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable DHCP snooping mode When enable DHCP snooping mode operation the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports disable Disable DHCP snooping mode default Show flow DHCP snooping mode Default Setting disable Example Enable DHCP snooping mode IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp snooping mode enable 434 Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode Description Set or show the DHCP snooping port mode Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Port Mode lt port_list gt
394. ort_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode 364 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port1 IGS 10020MT gt mac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Show all of MAC table IGS 10020MT gt mac dump Type VID MAC Address 00 30 00 33 22 55 00 30 4f 24 04 d1 None CPU 33 33 ff 24 04 d1 None CPU 33 33 ff a8 00 64 None CPU 40 61 86 04 18 69 10 ff ff ff ff ff ff 1 24 CPU MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics 365 Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set all of MAC statistics User s Manual of IGS 10020MT MAC Flush Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush 366 6 5 VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_li
395. oup Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 8 4 IGMP State Transitions Delaying Member Idle Member E IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service es Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 168 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 5 appears IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled IGMP SSM Range Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled Port Related Configuration ee Throttling lt All gt unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
396. ource Guard Entry Description Add or delete IP source guard static entry Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Entry lt port_list gt add delete lt vid gt lt allowed_ip gt lt allowed_mac gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports add Add new port IP source guard static entry delete Delete existing port IP source guard static entry lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt allowed_ip gt IP address a b c d IP address allowed for doing IP source guard lt allowed_mac gt MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC address allowed for doing IP source guard Example Add IP source guard static entry IGS 10020MT gt security network ip source guard entry 1 add 1 192 168 0 20 Security Network IP Source Guard Status Description Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 438 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Show IP source guard static and dynamic entries IGS 10020MT gt security network ip source guard status Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Description Show ARP inspection configuration Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Configuration Example Show ARP inspection configuration IGS 10020MT gt security network arp inspection configuration Security Network ARP Inspection Mode
397. p GE Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration amp Internet Explorer Ge Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards 5 Outlook Express A Network Load Balancing Manager r Remote Assistance ES Performance All Programs fan Ethereal gt By Services start egea 4 Terminal Services Manager Mia Domain Controller Security Policy 9 Help an Domain Security Policy 4 Event Viewer gt Search Internet Authentication Service G Internet Information Services 115 Manager fi Administrative Tools gt te Remote Desktops lan IxChariot gt a Routing and Remote Access JG Terminal Server Licensing Log Terminal Services Configuration we LL 9 13PM Figure 4 11 15 Windows 2003 AD Server Setting Path 269 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 7 Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed New Object User xi e Create in ca test pc Users First name test Initials Last name Full name test User logon name test ca test pe v User logon name pre Windows 2000 Figure 4 11 16 Add User Properties Screen New Object User Create in ca test pcLlsers Password eseses Confirm password eseees User must change password at next logon JV User cannot change password JV Password never expires Account is disabled lt Ba
398. page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Configuration Security AAA page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X supplicant software installed on his system The switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the backend server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The Network Access Server Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Mode seconds seconds seconds seconds Guest VLAN Enabled Port Configuration gt RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Admin State QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled Port State EE E T T o lt All gt
399. page shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users The MAC based VLAN Status screen in Figure 4 6 18 appears MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Static vw Auto refresh O Port Members DAA N Mac adress wan wo a 2 2 4 5 6 7 9 9 x0 Nodataexistsfortheuser No data exists for the user Figure 4 6 18 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration for User Static Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 141 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 13 IP Subnet based VLAN This page allows for adding updating and deleting IP subnet based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports The IP subnet based VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 19 appears IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh C Refresh Port Members SSS Delete VCE 10 1P Address mask Lenath vian 10 pelo po Currently no entries present Currently no entries present Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 6 19 IP subnet based VLAN Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete an IP
400. pically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media e Policy Policy Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined e TAG TAG is indic
401. port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx Xx XX XX XX lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Add Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in port1 and vid1 IGS 10020MT gt mac add 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Delete Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in vid1 IGS 10020MT gt mac delete 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 363 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Lookup state of Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 IGS 10020MT gt mac lookup 00 30 4f 01 01 02 MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 0 10 1000000 O disable default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set agetime value in 30 IGS 10020MT gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt p
402. pport Access Control List IP Based ACL MAC Based ACL Up to 123 entries Per port bandwidth control Bandwidth Control Ingress 500Kb 80Mbps Egress 64Kb 80Mbps RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 2 3 and 9 OS RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE 802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance 1EC60068 2 32 Free fall Stability Testing 1EC60068 2 27 Shock 1EC60068 2 6 Vibration IEEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100Base FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Standards Compliance IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP version 1 RFC 2236 IGMP version 2 RFC 3376 IGMP version 3 RFC 2710 MLD version 1 FRC 3810 MLD version 2 Environment Temperature 40 75 Degree C Relative Humidity 5 95 Non condensing Storage Temperature 40 75 Degree C g Relative Humidity 5 95 Non condensing 27 Operating User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 INSTALLA
403. qing 2 man VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dotiq Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q default Show VLAN out layer VLAN tag ether type Default Setting N A Example Set out layer VLAN tag Ethernet type for port 10 in man Ethernet type IGS 10020MT gt vlan ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry 371 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 1 Example Add port1 to port4 in VLAN10 IGS 10020MT gt vlan add 10 1 4 VLAN Forbidden Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry in forbidden table Syntax VLAN Forbidden Add lt vid gt lt name gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Frobidden add port1 to port4 in VLAN10 IGS 10020MT gt vlan forbidden add 10 1 4 VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt lt name gt 372 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Pa
404. r lt qce_id_next gt Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt LLC lt DSAP gt lt SSAP gt lt control gt SNAP lt PID gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt lt fragment gt lt sport gt lt dport gt ipv6 lt protocol gt lt sip_v6 gt lt dscp gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt class gt lt dp gt lt classified_dscp gt 497 Parameters lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt lt port_list gt lt tag gt lt vid gt lt pcp gt lt dei gt lt smac gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lic lt dsap gt lt ssap gt lt control gt snap lt pid gt ipv4 lt protocol gt lt sip gt lt dscp gt lt fragment gt lt sport gt lt dport gt ipv6 lt sip_v6 gt lt class gt lt dp gt User s Manual of IGS 10020MT QCE ID 1 256 default Next available ID Next QCE ID next_id 1 256 or last Port List port lt port_list gt or all default All ports Frame tag untag tag any VID 1 4095 or any either a specific VID or range of VIDs Priority Code Point specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or any Drop Eligible Indicator 0 1 or any Source MAC address xx xx xx or any 24 MS bits OUI Destinat
405. r access control For the USM entry the usmUserEnginelD and usmUserName are the entry s keys Ina simple agent usmUserEnginelD is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocol are None None authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol 92 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first
406. r query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second e URI Buttons Er Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 178 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 10 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service based on a specific subscription plan The MLD filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and MLD throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join MLD filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A MLD filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but onl
407. rames are redirected on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting e Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited All means all ports will have one specific setting e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled All means all ports will have one specific setting e State Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled 227 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT All means all po
408. rames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port 216 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the destination mirror port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Modification Buttons Remove All Click to clear the counters You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the page immediate Click to remove
409. rameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name Example Delete VLAN10 IGS 10020MT gt vlan delete 10 VLAN Forbidden Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax LAN Forbidden Delete lt vid gt lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt lt name gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or VLAN Name Example Forbidden delete VLAN10 IGS 10020MT gt vlan forbidden delete 10 VLAN Forbidden Lookup Description Lookup VLAN Forbidden port entry Syntax VLAN Forbidden Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet 373 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT VLAN Lookup Description Lookup VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt name lt name gt combined static nas mvr voice_vian all Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs name VLAN name string lt name gt VLAN name Maximum of 32 characters VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain atleast one alphabet combined Shows All the Combined VLAN database static Shows the VLAN entries configured by the administrator nas Shows the VLANs configured by NAS mvr Shows the VLANs configured by MVR voice_vlan Shows the VLANs configured by
410. rarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode 244 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT If an EAPOL fra
411. ration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show mirror configuration IGS 10020MT gt mirror configuration Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting disable Example Set port 2 for the mirror port IGS 10020MT gt mirror port 2 501 Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting disable Example Enable the mirror mode for port 1 4 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt mirror mode 1 4 enable 502 6 17 Configuration Command Configuration Save Description Save configuration to TFTP server Syntax Config Save lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name Configuration Load Description Load configuration from TFTP server Syntax Config Load lt ip_ser
412. ration screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears MLD Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled MLD SSM Range Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled lt All gt unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited unlimited 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fi 8 9 unlimited b emo unlimited Figure 4 8 11 MLD Snooping Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding Enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregistered IPMCv 6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Leave Proxy Enable Enable MLD Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Proxy Enable Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side 176 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier If an aggregation me
413. rational status IGS 10020MT gt ipme status igmp 1 IPMC Group Description Show IPMC group addresses accordingly Syntax IPMC Groups mld igmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC group addresses accordingly IGS 10020MT gt ipme groups igmp 1 526 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IPMC Version Description Show IPMC Versions Syntax IPMC Version mldligmp lt vid gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN 1 IPMC Versions IGS 10020MT gt ipme version igmp 1 IPMC SSM Description Show SSM related information for IPMC Syntax IPMC SSM mld igmp lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters mld igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any default Show all VLANs lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN 1 amp port 1 10 SSM related information for IPMC IGS 10020MT gt ipmessm igmp 1 1 10 527 IPMC Parameter RV Description Set or show the IPMC Robustness Variable Syntax IPMC Parameter RV mld igmp lt vid gt ipmc_param_rv Parameters mid igmp mld IPMC for IPv6 MLD igmp IPMC for IPv4 IGMP lt vid gt
414. rces of the DHCP message All means all ports will have one specific setting 285 Buttons Save Click to save changes User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping The statistics only counter packet under DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for system DHCP client The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears The page includes the following fields DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Port 1 Potl vw Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Rx Offer Rx Request Rx Decline Rx ACK Rx NAK Rx Release Rx Inform Rx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active Tx Discover Tx Offer Tx Request Tx Decline Tx ACK Tx NAK Tx Release Tx Inform Tx Lease Query Tx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Active g E O E O E O E O Auto refresh O Figure 4 12 9 DHCP Snooping Port Statistics Screen Page Screenshot Object Description Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 wi
415. re THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care e IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 Any Any value is allowed don t care e Ethernet E IP Parameters Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object Description e IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A
416. ress 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port LAN ID MAC Address IP Address No more entries Auto refresh C Figure 4 13 3 Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Screenshot Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume 295 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is
417. ress a b c d IP address allowed for doing ARP request Example Add ARP inspection static entry 440 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Network ARP Inspection Status Description Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries Syntax Security Network ARP Inspection Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show ARP inspection static and dynamic entries IGS 10020MT gt security network arp inspection status Security AAA Configuration Description Show Auth configuration Syntax Security AAA Configuration Example Show Auth configuration IGS 10020MT gt security aaa configuration AAA Configuration Server Timeout 15 seconds Server Dead Time 300 seconds RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration 441 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration Mode IP Address Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled TACACS Authentication Server Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Security AAA Timeout Description Set or show server timeout Syntax Security AAA Timeout lt timeout gt 442 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt timeout gt Server response timeout 3 3600 seconds default Show server timeout configuration Default Setting 15 Example S
418. ress but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Original Ethernet New Tagged Packet Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Data Old CRC Dest Addr Src Addr E type Tag Length E type Data New CRC Priority CFI VLAN ID 119 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the net
419. ring the Power Inputs section for knowing the information about how to wire the power The power LED on the Industrial Managed Switch will light up Please refer to the LED Indicators section for indication of LED lights 5 Prepare the twisted pair straight through Category 5 cable for Ethernet connection 6 Insert one side of RJ 45 cable category 5 into the Industrial Managed Switch Ethernet port RJ 45 port and another side of RJ 45 cable category 5 to the network device s Ethernet port RJ 45 port ex Switch PC or Server The UTP port RJ 45 LED on the Industrial Managed Switch will light up when the cable is connected with the network device Please refer to the LED Indicators section for LED light indication en Make sure that the connected network devices support MDI MDI X If it does not support use the crossover category 5 cable Note 7 When all connections are set and LED lights all show in normal the installation is complete 33 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 2 2 DIN Rail Mounting This section describes how to install the Industrial Managed Switch There have two methods to install the Industrial Managed Switch DIN Rail Mounting and Wall Mount Plate Mounting Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented Step 1 Screw the DIN Rail on the Industrial Managed Switch Step 2 Lightly press the button of DIN Rail into the track a 34 User
420. rity AAA ACCT_RADIUS Description Set or show RADIUS accounting server setup Syntax Security AAA ACCT_RADIUS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show RADIUS accounting server configuration enable Enable RADIUS accounting server disable Disable RADIUS accounting server default Show RADIUS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt secret gt Secret shared with external accounting server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed lt server_port gt Server UDP port Use 0 to use the default RADIUS port 1813 444 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set RADIUS accounting server configuration IGS 10020MT gt security acct_radius 1 enable 192 168 0 20 12345678 1813 Security AAA TACACS Description Set or show TACACS authentication server setup Syntax Security AAA TACACS lt server_index gt enable disable lt ip_addr_string gt lt secret gt lt server_port gt Parameters The server index 1 5 default Show TACACS authentication server configuration enable Enable TACACS authentication server disable Disable TACACS authentication server default Show TACACS server mode lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d
421. rity and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of areceived BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet path with the minimum cost as the active ports path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state Port priority Port cost Bridge Priority 0 Auto Default
422. rk is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation ARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care RARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware 221 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT address field THA settings 0 RARP frames whe
423. rn nan rara 397 Security Switch SNMP Trap Authentication Failure ooconnnnnnnniccnnnoccconononnnononcncnnnonnn rca non rn cnn nr 398 Security Switch SNMP Trap LinkUp iint narrar rre 398 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Mode cooocccccoccccconoccnonononcnn nono ncnn nono nc nono cnn ran n nr nnnn rr rre 399 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform TiMeOUt ooooonoccccnnnoccninononanononononanoncncnono cnn rnnn cnc naar nr rr narran rre 399 Security Switch SNMP Trap Inform Retry TiMES ooooonoccccnnnoccnnnoncccnononcnn nono cnn nooo nn nn no nr r rra rn rn rra 400 Security Switch SNMP Trap Probe Security Engine ID ooonnconnncccnnnoccccnonocnnonononcnnnoncnc nono nnnronrn cnn nan nn r narran 400 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security Engine lD oooononnccnnnnncconococcnnnoncnononannno nono nc nono nr rr nano nn 401 Security Switch SNMP Trap Security NAME oooooconccconnoccccnononcnononcnonnnonnnnnono cnn nan n nn nano nr rr narrar nn rra rre rre 401 Security Switch SNMP Engine ID arpetan a ide 402 Security Switch SNMP Community Add c cocococccccoccccnononcnonononcno nono cc nono nn nn nono nn r norris 402 Security Switch SNMP Community Delete o oooioccccnnnocccononocanononcncnononcncnono cnn rnnnn nn naar nr r nan 403 Security Switch SNMP Community LO0kKUP ooooccoccccnnnoccnonononanononononanonnnnnnno cnn o nonn nn nano nr rr narran 403 11 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch SNMP User Addie ierit nono non n cnn ano n nr rra
424. rol user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses Limit forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refiesh Click to refresh the page immediate 283 4 12 7 Port Security Detail User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it Fora MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If onl
425. ronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance 553 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUI is the organizationally unique identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 10 frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was
426. ror CPU CPU Once Conflict No entries Combined x Auto refresh mj Refresh Figure 4 10 1 ACL Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames 214 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Redirect Indicates the port redirec
427. rre 404 Security Switch SNMP User Delete vsi neneiia e ce 404 Security Switch SNMP User Changekey cccooocccccocccccononcncnononcnonononcnnno nn nn non nn nr non n nn rn nn rre rre 405 Security Switch SNMP User Lookup ooooooocccococccononoccnononcnonono nono nono tant non n nr nano n nn narrar 405 Security Switch SNMP Group Add evioicionoiconic e 406 Security Switch SNMP Group Delete dai 407 Security Switch SNMP Group LO0kUP ooooocccococcconoccncnononcncnono nono nono nc canon nn rnnnn nn nr nn nr 407 Security Switch SNMP View Add ooooccoonoccccconoccconononccononcncnnno cnn rro n nn naar n rr rra rre erre rra 408 Security Switch SNMP View Deletes esiin a a i E i Naaa 408 Security Switch SNMP View Lookup coooooocccococccononcccnononcncnononcno noc ccoo nn nn rr narrar rre 409 Security Switch SNMP Access Add civic iia 409 Security Switch SNMP Access Delete oooocccococccnnocccccononcncnnnancno noc cnnnno untk nono cnn rro n cnn nana 410 Security Switch SNMP Access LOOkUP ooocccococcconoccccnononcncnono nono nono nnnn non e E E N TEA E a aaa 410 Security Network Psec Switches ivicacicoiia a ria 411 Security Network Pset POs octetos taifas ett 412 Security Network Limit Configuration ooooocinnnnnnnoncccnnnoncncnononnno nono tuutin untk nono cnn ran n nn nano rr rra rre 412 Security Network LiMit Mode oiioiii a 413 Security Network LiMit AGIND cviomici acia 414 Security Network Limit AgetiMe cocodrilo ida 414 Security Network
428. rrent IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch IGS Industrial Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 x IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 1 Remote Telnet Interface Management In Windows system you may click Start then choose Acessories and Command Prompt please input telnet 192 168 0 100 and press enter from your keyboard You will see the following screen appears EN Telnet 192 168 0 100 Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers IGS 16626MT oS oS pea O O i 2 4i 6i 8i E ee ee E E oo oe E Username Figure 3 2 Remote Telnet Interface Main Screen of Industrial Managed Switch For more information about using the Remote Telnet interface refer to Chapter 5 Remote Telnet Interface Management 44 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 3 4 Web Management The Industrial Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Industrial Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the Indusirial Managed Switch you can access the Industrial Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch IGS Industrial Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 x IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 3 Web Management
429. rs MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Auto refresh Refresh lt lt gt gt Port Members MAC address vean 10 i gt fo esfolzffo z0 Currently no entries present Add New Entry Reset Figure 4 6 17 MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted in the stack e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons 2 ety Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry E bas Click to save changes y Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh l Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Click to refresh the page immediate g Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC based VLAN Table k Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 140 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 6 12 MAC based VLAN Status This
430. rs QoS Egress Port Shapers disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled al 2 3 4 5 6 fd 8 3 10 Figure 4 9 5 QoS Egress Port Shapers Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 e QO Q7 Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps e Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps 193 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 5 1 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers The Port Scheduler and Shapers for a specific por
431. rs country state county city district block street Country National subdivisions state caton region province prefecture County parish gun JP district IN City townchip shi JP City division borough city district ward chou JP Neighborhood block Street leading_street_direction Leading street direction trailing_street_suffix str_suf house_no house_no_ suffix landmark additional_info name zip_code building apartment floor room_number place_type postal_com_name p_o box additional_code Trailing street suffix Street Suffix House Number House number suffix Landmark or vanity address Additional location information Bame residence and office occupant Postal zip code Building structure Unit apartment suite Floor Room number Placetype Postal community name Post office box P O Box Addtional code default Show Civic Address Location configuration lt civic_value gt lldpmed The value for the Civic Address Location entry 472 LLDPMED ECS Description Set or show LLDP MED Emergency Call Service Syntax LLDPMED ecs lt ecs_value gt Parameters lt ecs_value gt lldpmed The value for the Emergency Call Service LLDPMED Policy Delete Description Delete the selected policy Syntax LLDPMED policy delete lt policy_list gt Parameters lt policy_list gt List of policies to delet
432. rt w Enable x Enable Figure 4 16 1 Loop Protection Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields General Settings Object Description e Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole e Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds e Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart 322 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the port e Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port e Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only e Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 16 2 Status This page displays the loop protection port status the ports from the Industrial Managed Switch Loop Protection Statu
433. rt_list gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting Disable Example Show STP Bridge status IGS 10020MT gt stp status CIST Bridge STP Status Bridge ID 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root ID 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Root Port Is Root PathCost 0 Regional Root 80 00 00 30 4F 24 04 D1 Int PathCost 0 Max Hops 20 Steady Port Role State Pri PathCost Edge P2P Uptime DesignatedPort Forwarding 128 20000 Yes Yes 0d 00 10 32 451 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT STP MSTI Priority Description Set or show the bridge instance priority Syntax STP Msti Priority lt msti gt lt priority gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt priority gt STP bridge priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 Example Set MST1 priority value in 48 IGS 10020MT gt stp msti priority 1 48 STP MSTI Map Description Show or clear MSTP MSTI VLAN mapping configuration Syntax STP Msti Map lt msti gt clear Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 Clear Clear VID to MSTI mapping Example Add MST1 priority value in 48 IGS 10020MT gt stp msti priority 1 48 452 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT STP MSTI Add Description Add a VLAN to a MSTI Syntax STP Msti Add lt msti gt lt vid gt P
434. rts will have one specific setting e Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Ww c o 5 o Save Click to save changes et Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone e fF E Click to clear the counters 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EAS AS et Na QU NN Oo WO EEE NN mb ey Figure 4 10 5 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Page Screenshot 228 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter 1D for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second All means all ports will have one specific setting Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 229 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 Authentication This section is to control the access of the Managed Switch includes the user access and management control The Aut
435. ry another port on the Industrial Managed Switch Make sure the cable is installed properly Make sure the cable is the right type Turn off the power After a while turn on power again Can install MGB SX or other non wide temperature SFP module into SFP slot of Industrial Managed Switch Solution Yes it does However since the MGB SX and other non wide temperature SFP module cannot operate under 40 to 75 Degree C Please pay attention to this point and consider use PLANET wide temperature SFP module for Industrial Managed Switch 541 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT E while IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 5 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx P2 FAULT EN a E 3 a a E g A UNK ACI RESET Reset Y 1000 542 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT APPENDEX A A 1 Switch s Data RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable i
436. s e Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e LastID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication e QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here 246 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Fl Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 11 5 Network Access Statistics This page provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Use the port select box to select which port de
437. s Figure 4 8 9 IGMP Snooping Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Lk lt Updates the table starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 174 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 8 7 IGMPv3 Information Entries in the IGMP SFM Information Table are shown on this page The IGMP SFM Souce Filtered Multicast Information Table also contains the SSM Source Specific Multicast information This table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Diffrent source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table The Start from VLAN and Group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP SFM Information Table The IGMPv3 Information screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears
438. s Auto refresh Refresh No ports enabled No ports enabled Figure 4 16 2 Loop Protection Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action e Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode e Loops The number of loops detected on this port e Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 323 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 17 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used group 1 2 3 and 9 NW Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics E Alarm Allow management console users to set a
439. s necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant Interface Cross Tx transmit Tx transmit Tx transmit Tx transmit 543 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown SIDE 2 8 Brown Crossover Cable SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown SIDE 2 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Please make sure your c
440. s Dropped radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS PacketsDropped packets that were received from the server on the accounting port and dropped for some other reason Tx Requests radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS 263 Requests packets sent to the server This does not include retransmissions User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Tx Retransmissions radiusAccClientExt Retransmissions Tx Pending radiusAccClientExt Requests PendingRequests Tx Timeouts radiusAccClientExt Timeouts The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout e Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4670 Name Description IP Address IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question State Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected
441. s Oty 231 leewan K O C gt RMON lel YUL 2 2219 95 18 ex BLO 2 2213 5328 Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Help Button Main Screen Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Industrial Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports Y SFP Ports Lai ia 52 Main Menu User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Industrial Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Industrial Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLANs Spanning Tree Multicast Qos Access Control List Authentication Security MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics Loop Protection RMON 53 Figure 4 1 5 Industrial Managed Switch Main Functions Menu 4 2 System User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Industrial Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system i
442. s Overview Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The interface that allowed remote host can access the Industrial Managed Switch e Receive Packets The received packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets The allowed packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled e Discard Packets The discarded packets number from the interface under access management mode is enabled Buttons H Auto refresh i i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate cra J Clear all statistics 279 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 4 HTTPs Configure HTTPS on this page The HTTPS Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 4 appears HTTPS Configuration E Mode Disabled w Automatic Redirect Disabled v Figure 4 12 4 HTTPS Configuration Screen Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mod
443. s configured with the specified policy The default is that the rule applies to all ports Syntax Security Network ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt switch port lt port_list gt policy lt policy gt lt tagged gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt 427 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT lt ip_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt lt tcp_flags gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt mirror gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 256 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 256 default Add ACE last switch port lt port_list gt policy lt policy gt lt tagged gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt udp lt sport gt lt dport gt
444. s enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet RADIUS Accounting Servers User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description Rx Responses radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS Responses packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExt The number of malformed Responses MalformedRespons RADIUS packets received es from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses Rx Bad radiusAcctClientExt The number of RADIUS Authenticators BadAuthenticators packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server Rx Unknown Types radiusAccClientExt The number of RADIUS UnknownTypes packets of unknown types that were received from the server on the accounting port Rx Packet
445. s gt Traffic class 0 7 Default Setting 7 Example Set 4 traffic class for voice VLAN IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan traffic class4 Voice VLAN OUI Add Description Add Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process The maximum entry number is 16 Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Add lt oui_addr gt lt description gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed lt description gt Entry description Use clear or to clear the string No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a contact only in CLI 514 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Add Voice VLAN OUI entry IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan oui add 00 11 22 test Voice VLAN OUI Delete Description Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Delete lt oui_addr gt Parameters lt oui_addr gt OUI address xx xx xx The null OUI address isn t allowed Example Delete Voice VLAN OUI entry IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan oui delete 00 11 22 Voice VLAN OUI Clear Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI table will restart auto detect OUI process Syntax Voice VLAN OUI Clear Example Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan oui clear 515 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Voice VLAN OUI Lookup Description Clear Voice VLAN OUI entry Modify OUI t
446. s of PCP and DEI for tagged frames e PCP DEI to QoS The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items class DP level Controls the mapping of the classified PCP DEI to QoS class DP level values Mapping when Tag Classification is set to Enabled Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Return to the previous page 4 9 4 Port Scheduler This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports The Port Scheduler screen in Figure 4 9 4 appears QoS Egress Port Schedulers Kai Q3 strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority Strict Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 Zz 8 3 10 Figure 4 9 4 QoS Egress Port Schedule Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers For more detail please refer to chapter 4 9 5 1 192 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port e Q0 Q5 Shows the weight for this queue and port 4 9 5 Port Shaping This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports The Port Shapping screen in Figure 4 9 5 appea
447. s tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged Table 4 6 1 Ingress Egress port with VLAN VID Tag Untag table Ml IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing 122 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4095 Q in Q VLAN Tunnel a a MAN Service Provider Domain VLAN 1 20 ana VLAN Tag VLA N Tag MAN Edge Switch Q in Q VLAN Tunnel
448. s the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Wikipedia WPA PSK is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected_Access Pre Shared Key WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable 561 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPA Radius is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Access Radius 802 1X authentication server WPA was designed to enhance the security of wireless networks There are two flavors of WPA enterprise and personal Enterprise is meant for use with an IEEE 802 1X authentication server which distributes different keys to each user Personal WPA utilizes less scalable pre shared key PSK mode where every allowed computer is given the same passphrase In PSK mode security depends on the strength and secrecy of the passphrase The design of WPA is based on a Draft 3 of the IEEE 802 11i standard Wikipedia WPS is an acronym for Wi Fi Protected Setup It is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless home network The goal of the WPS protocol
449. sable Disable UPnP default Show UPnP mode Default Setting disable 505 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable the UPnP mode IGS 10020MT gt upnp mode enable UPnP TTL Description Set or show the TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages Syntax UPnP TTL sttl gt Parameters lt ttl gt ttl range 1 255 default Show UPnP TTL Default Setting 4 Example Set the value 10 for TTL value of the IP header in SSDP messages IGS 10020MT gt upnp ttl 10 UPnP Advertising Duration Description Set or show UPnP Advertising Duration Syntax UPnP Advertising Duration lt duration gt Parameters lt duration gt duration range 100 86400 default Show UPnP duration range Default Setting 100 506 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set value 1000 for UPnP Advertising Duration IGS 10020MT gt upnp advertising duration 1000 6 20 MVR Command MVR Configuration Description Show the MVR configuration Syntax MVR Configuration Example Show the MVR configuration IGS 10020MT gt mvr configuration MVR Configuration MVR Mode Disabled Muticast VLAN ID 100 Port Port Mode Port Type Immediate Leave Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Receive Disabled Disabled Re
450. sabled From forwarding to disabled E From disabled to blocking 147 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Blocking En Learning Disable Forwarding Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Es Bridge and the Designated Bridges Li On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level 148 Parameter Description User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set prio
451. sabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Voice VLAN Mode Description Set or show the Voice VLAN mode We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Syntax Voice VLAN Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable Voice VLAN mode disable Disable Voice VLAN mode default Show flow Voice VLAN mode Default Setting disable 512 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable the Voice VLAN mode IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan mode enable Voice VLAN ID Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN ID lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting 1000 Example Set ID 2 for Voice VLAN ID IGS 10020MT gt voice vlan id 2 Voice VLAN Agetime Description Set or show Voice VLAN age time Syntax Voice VLAN Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 10000000 default Show age time Default Setting 86400sec 513 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set Voice VLAN age time in 100sec IGS 10020MT gt voice valn agetime 100 Voice VLAN Traffic Class Description Set or show Voice VLAN ID Syntax Voice VLAN Traffic Class lt class gt Parameters lt clas
452. sceiver that is not supported the Industrial Managed Switch will not recognize it Vote 1000Base SX LX Before connect the other switches workstation or Media Converter 1 Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the Multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Industrial Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 100Base FX Before connect the other switches workstation or Media Converter 40 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type or WDM pair for example 100Base FX to 100Base FX 100Base BX20 U to 100Base BX20 D Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt To connect to MFB FX SFP transceiver use the multi mode fiber cable
453. se MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X 242 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence o
454. sed VLAN screen in Figure 4 6 20 appears Protocol to Group Mapping Table No Group entry found Add New Entry Save Reset Auto refresh Refresh Figure 4 6 20 Protocol to Group Mapping Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values 143 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of XX XX xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges
455. server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts 264 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Round Trip radiusAccClientExtRo Time undTripTime Buttons were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate ca Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation 265 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 11 9 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In t
456. setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration gt Security gt AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled for that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled for all ports e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provi
457. sources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description e Port The port number for which the configuration below applies e Mode The Configuration All with available options will assign to whole ports Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port e Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The stackswitch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all ava
458. splaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are stack global The MSTI Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 9 amp Figure 4 7 10 appears MSTI Port Configuration Select MSTI MSTI Figure 4 7 9 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Select MSTI Select the bridge instance and set more detail configuration 161 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT MST1 MSTI Port Configuration MSTI Aggregated Ports Configuration Auto MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Port Path Cost 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 b CH NN E EM En EME E ES Figure 4 7 10 MST1 MSTI Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields MSTx MSTI Port Configuration Object Description e Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole items Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of hi
459. st gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 IGS 10020MT gt vlan configuration 1 VLAN Configuration Mode IEEE 802 1Q Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q in Q Mode Eth type Disabled All UnTag Disable N A VID VLAN Name VLAN forbidden table is empty VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID 367 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 Example Set PVID2 for port10 IGS 10020MT gt vlan pvid 10 2 VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port10 that allow tagged frames only IGS 10020MT gt vlan frametype 10 tagged 368 VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress f
460. strial Managed Switch indicates a DC inlet power socket and consist one terminal block connector within 6 contacts It accepts input power from 12 to 48V DC also AC 24V TG 4 90 04 00 0 2 O0o0O000O00O00O0O WO 0OO0OOOG O O O O00 Q OQ Q O00 O00 O00 O00 O00 O Vi Vi Y V2 V2 Input i j DC 12V 48V AC 24V PWR1 Fault PWR2 Figure 2 3 IGS 10020MT Upper Panel 32 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 2 Install the Industrial Managed Switch This section describes how to install your Industrial Managed Switch and make connections to the Industrial Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Industrial Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps In this paragraph we will describe how to install the Industrial Managed Switch and the installation points attended to it 2 2 1 Installation Steps 1 Unpack the Industrial Managed Switch 2 Check if the DIN Rail is screwed on the Industrial Managed Switch or not If the DIN Rail is not screwed on the Industrial Managed Switch please refer to DIN Rail Mounting section for DIN Rail installation If users want to wall mount the Industrial Managed Switch please refer to Wall Mount Plate Mounting section for wall mount plate installation 3 To hang the Industrial Managed Switch on the DIN Rail track or wall 4 Power on the Industrial Managed Switch Please refer to the Wi
461. switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address 230 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as telnet and Web browser This Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options m Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS m Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS m Local user name and Priviledge Level control RADIUS and TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the Managed Switch 4 11 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authent
462. t appear e DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation e DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific 223 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT DIP mask in dotted decimal notation ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears e ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is O to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value e ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description e TCP UDP So
463. t Port list or all default All ports none No DSCP ingress classification zero Classify DSCP if DSCP 0 selected Classify DSCP for which class mode is enable all Classify all DSCP default Show port DSCP ingress classification mode Default Setting none Example Set DSCP classification based on QoS class and DP level in zero IGS 10020MT gt QoS Port DSCP Classification 1 10 zero QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark Description Set or show the port DSCP remarking mode Syntax QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark lt port_list gt disable enable remap_dp_unaware remap_dp_aware Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable DSCP egress rewrite enable Enable DSCP egress rewrite with the value received from analyzer remap_dp_unaware Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP where remap is DP unaware or DP 0 remap_dp_aware Rewrite DSCP in egress frame with remapped DSCP where remap is DP aware and DP 1 default Show port DSCP egress remarking mode 493 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable Example Enable DSCP egress rewrite IGS 10020MT gt QoS Port DSCP EgressRemark 1 10 enable QoS DSCP Map Description Set or show DSCP mapping table This table is used to map QoS class and DP level based on DSCP value DSCP value used to map QoS class and DPL is either translated DSCP value or incoming frame DSCP value Syntax Qo
464. t Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable switch access mode IGS 10020MT gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Add Description Add access management entry default Add all supported protocols 389 Syntax User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch Access Add lt access_id gt lt start_ip_addr gt lt end_ip_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ip_addr gt Start IP address a b c d lt end_ip_addr gt End IP address a b c d web Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS snmp Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP telnet Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH Example Add access management list from 192 168 0 1 to 192 168 0 200 via web interface Security Switch Access IPv6 Add Description Add access management IPv6 entry default Add all supported protocols Syntax Security Switch Access lpv6 Add lt access_id gt lt start_ipv6_addr gt lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmp telnet Parameters lt access_id gt entry index 1 16 lt start_ipv6_addr gt Start IPv6 address lt end_ipv6_addr gt web snmp IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separates each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symb
465. t are configured on this page The QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shaper sscreen in Figure 4 9 6 appears Queue Shaper Enable Rate Unit Excess Pot1 y QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Swit Prony Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit Save Resat Cancel Figure 4 9 6 QoS Egress Port Schedule and Shapers Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Schedule Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port e Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port e Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 100 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 3300 when the Unit is Mbps e Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps e Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth e Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted 194 e Queue Scheduler Percent User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter
466. t at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection es devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that 0 does not support VLAN tagging 120 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Hi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame M Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Hi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to re
467. t be changed and the priority is highest The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 2 appears Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Redirect Mirror Counter Auto refresh l Refresh Clear Remove All Figure 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match all ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames e Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny F
468. t on the other stack switch units but with no port members 126 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT AVLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs Click to add new VLAN Save Click to save changes y Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values i Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN ID input fields sd Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID gg Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 4 6 6 VLAN Membership Status This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 6 4 appears VLAN Membership Status for Combined Users Combined v Start from WLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members C For embers vcavio 23 5 6 7 9 5 wo 1 MMMM Auto refresh C Figure 4 6 4 VLAN Membership Status for Static User Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users is selected
469. t operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are redirected to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port redirect operation is disabled e Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled e CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU e Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame e Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Combined w Select the ACL status from this drop down list Auto refresh i l Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 215 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 10 2 Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a newACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence canno
470. t stp port mcheck 1 STP MSTI Port Configuration Description Show the STP port instance configuration Syntax STP Msti Port Configuration lt msti gt lt port_list gt 458 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default auto STP MSTI Port Cost Description Set or show the STP port instance path cost Syntax STP Msti Port Cost lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt STP port path cost 1 200000000 or auto Default auto Example Set MSTI7 in port IGS 10020MT gt stp msti port cost 7 1 MSTI Port Path Cost MST7 1 Auto STP MSTI Port Priority Description Set or show the STP port instance priority Syntax STP Msti Port Priority lt msti gt lt port_list gt lt priority gt 459 Parameters lt msti gt STP bridge instance no 0 7 CIST 0 MSTI1 1 lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt STP port priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default 128 6 9 Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Aggregation
471. t the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 4 7 2 STP System Configuration This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within each Spanning Tree The STP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 4 appears STP Bridge Configuration Basic Settings Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering O eee Port BPDU Guard O Port Error Port Error Recovery O Figure 4 7 4 STP Bridge Configuration Page Screenshot 152 The page includes the following fields Basic Settings Object User s Manual o
472. tails to be displayed The Network Access Statistics screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears NAS Statistics Port 1 Port Auto refresh Ll Port State Admin State Force Authorized Port State Globally Disabled Figure 4 11 6 Network Access Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Port State Object Description e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values e Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID 247 Port Counters Object User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Read more about Guest VLANs here Description e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states Force Authorized Force Unauthorized Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X Direction Name IEEE Name Description Rx Total dotixAuthEapolFrames The number of valid EAPOL Rx fr
473. tate can be one of the following values Disabled Blocking Learning 163 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Forwarding Non STP e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Auto refresh i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 7 9 Port Statistics This page displays the STP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The STP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 12 appears STP Statistics Transmitted Discarded No ports enabled Auto refresh C Figure 4 7 12 STP Statistics Page Screenshot gt mste este ste ren mst este ste ren unknown megar No ports enabled OSS U O The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port e Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and
474. tch SSH Mode Description Set or show the SSH mode Syntax Security Switch SSH Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable SSH disable Disable SSH default Show SSH mode Default Setting enable 385 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable SSH function IGS 10020MT gt security switch ssh mode enable Security Switch HTTPs Configuration Description Show HTTPS configuration Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Configuration Example Show HTTPs configuration IGS 10020MT gt security switch https configuration HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Mode Enable HTTPS Redirect Mode Disabled Security Switch HTTPs Mode Description Set or show the HTTPS mode Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs disable Disable HTTPs default Show HTTPs mode Default Setting enable 386 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Enable HTTPs function IGS 10020MT gt security switch https mode enable Security Switch HTTPs Redirect Description Set or show the HTTPS redirect mode Automatic redirect web browser to HTTPS during HTTPS mode enabled Syntax Security Switch HTTPS Redirect enable disable Parameters enable Enable HTTPs redirect disable Disable HTTPs redirect default Show HTTPs redirect mode Default Setting disable Example Enable HTTPs redirect function IGS 10020MT gt security switch h
475. tch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 13 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging E Aging Time 300 MAC Table Learning Port Members Jifa2 3 s sjo6j7 sjoli0 Auto 00000 0000 Disable Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members A Delete VLAN 10 mac adas 2 e 5 e 7 a 9 20 Add New Static Entry Figure 4 13 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Page Screenshot 292 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The page includes the following fields Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Object Description e Disable Automatic Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds MAC Table Learning
476. te Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish
477. te and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following a One switch is elected as the root switch The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch E A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take
478. tets received with invalid CRC e Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC e Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment e 64 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length e 65 127 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length e 128 255 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length e 256 511 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length e 512 1023 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length e 1024 1588 Buttons The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1588 octets in length Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 337 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the Industrial Managed Switch via a Telnet connection the Industrial Managed Switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the Industrial Managed Switch s command line interface CLI is very similar
479. th value 3 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted 286 e Rx and Tx Inform User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and Active transmitted Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate Clear tear J Clears the counters for the selected port 287 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 12 10 IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traff
480. than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false A transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media All means all ports will have one specific setting 156 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 802 1w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Ter 802 IEEE 602 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 999 999 Trunk 1 000 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 157 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 7 5 MSTI Priorities This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well The MSTI Priority screen in Figure 4
481. the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted System Capabilities Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and 300 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB e Management Address Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address Buttons Save Click to save changes Rese J Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 301 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 14 3 LLDP MED Configuration This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED The LLDP MED Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 2 appears LLDP MED Configuration Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count Coordinates Location ali js E Civic Address Location
482. the Industrial Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Remote Telnet Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages Text based Telnet functionality built into Windows XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 operating systems Can be accesses from any location Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 43 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 3 3 Remote Telnet The Remote Telnet is an IP based command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can access the Industrial Managed Switch remote telnet interface from personal computer or workstation in the same Ethernet environment As long as you know the cu
483. the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link CC is an acronym for Continuity Check It is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP 546 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique
484. ther pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes e Excessive Collision Configure port transmit collision behavior Mode Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart back off algorithm after 16 collisions e Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled ES When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The _ Auto MDIX function will disable Note Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 99 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Refresh Click to refresh the page Any changes made locally will be undone 4 4 2 Port Statisti
485. ther than by auto negotiation e Auto negotiation Auto negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC PHY capabilities Capabilities Buttons Auto refresh H i Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediate 4 14 5 Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor Information screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears LLDP Neighbour Information Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address No LLDP neighbour information found Auto refresh O Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Neighbor Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit 311 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible 9 capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repe
486. ting can be one of All means all ports will have one specific setting m Disable No Egress rewrite m Enable Rewrite enabled without remapping m Remap DP Unaware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value The remapped DSCP value is always taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP0 table m Remap DP Aware DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value Depending on the DP level of the frame the remapped DSCP value is either taken from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP0 table or from the DSCP Translation gt Egress Remap DP 1 table Buttons Save Click to save changes _Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 198 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 8 DSCP Based QoS This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches The DSCP Based QoS screen in Figure 4 9 10 appears DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification E lt All gt fe lt All gt f 0 BE E 0f ofr 1 E 0 7 ojx 2 E 0 f of 3 m of 0 4 E 0 7 of 5 A 0 6 A of olx 7 E of of 8 CS1 0 y of 9 m 0 fi of 10 AF11 E 0 7 of 11 A ofz 0 12 AF12 of Of 13 al of ole 14 AF13 ofr of Figure 4 9 10 DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Page Screenshot The page includes the followi
487. tion Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap link up and link down mode operation e Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation e Trap Inform Timeout seconds Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 e Trap Inform Retry Times Buttons Save Click to save changes Indicates the SNMP trap informs retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 89 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 3 3 SNMP System Information The switch system information is provided here The SNMP System Information screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears System Information Configuration IGS 10020MT ECE System Location Save Reset Figure 4 3 2 System Information Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is t
488. tion Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Fast start repeat count Object Description e Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class Fore example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class II also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class 1 and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all
489. tion configuration IGS 10020MT gt security switch auth configuration Auth Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled local local local local Security Switch Auth Method Description Set or show Auth method default Show Auth method Syntax User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch Auth Method console telnet ssh web none local radius tacacs enable disable Parameters console Settings for console telnet Settings for telnet ssh Settings for ssh web Settings for web default Set or show the specific client authentication method none Authentication disabled local Use local authentication radius Use remote RADIUS authentication tacacs Use remote TACACS authentication default Show client authentication method enable Enable local authentication if remote auth disable Disable local authentication if remote auth The parameter is effective when it is typed Default Setting disable entication fails entication fails 384 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Use RADIUS authentication method for telnet IGS 10020MT gt security switch auth method telnet radius enable Security Switch SSH Configuration Description Show SSH configuration Syntax Security Switch SSH Configuration Example Show SSH configuration IGS 10020MT gt security switch ssh configuration SSH Configuration SSH Mode Enable Security Swi
490. to OxFF or Any the default value is Any e SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within Ox00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any e IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF 11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes no jany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF 11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 206 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port ran
491. to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both PPPoE is an acronym for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It is a network protocol for encapsulating Point to Point Protocol PPP frames inside Ethernet frames It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver modem over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks Wikipedia In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID 555 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each a
492. to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI 5 2 Telnet Login The Industrial Managed Switch supports telnet for remote management The Industrial Managed Switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for username amp password rn Telnet 192 168 0 100 Welcome to PLANET Command Line Interface Port Numbers IGS 16626MT t gt t 1 2 4i 6i 8i 4 4 tth Username admin Password ogin in progress IGS 10020 0MT 7 gt 338 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 COMMAND LINE MODE The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Security Security management STP Spanning Tree Protocol Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDPMED Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media EEE Energy Efficient Ethernet Thermal Thermal Protection QoS Quality of Service Mirror Port mirroring Config Load Save of configuration via TFTP Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP UPnP Univers
493. to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 201 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 9 10 DSCP Classification This page allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value The DSCP Classification screen in Figure 4 9 12 appears DSCP Classification QoS Class DSCP e O O O O KB TO 2 0 HB CO O 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 T Reset Figure 4 9 12 DSCP Classification Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes e DSCP The Configuration All with available values will assign to whole QoS Class Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 202 4 9 11 QoS Control List User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list The QoS Control List screen
494. traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP The LLDP Neighbors EEE Information screen in Figure 4 14 6 appears LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Auto refresh C Refresh Local Port Fallback Receive Tw Echo Tx Tw Echo Rx Tw Resolved Tx Tw Resolved Rx Tw EEE in Sync No LLDP EEE information found Figure 4 14 6 LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Tw The link parther s maximum time that transmit path can holdoff sending data after deassertion of LPI e Rx Tw The link parther s time that receiver would like the transmitter to holdoff to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep Fallback Receive Tw The link parther s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive
495. trusted untrusted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message default Show flow DHCP snooping port mode Default Setting trusted Example Set untrusted DHCP snooping port mode in port 1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp snooping port mode 1 untrusted Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics Description Show or clear DHCP snooping statistics Syntax Security Network DHCP Snooping Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear DHCP snooping statistics Example Show DHCP snooping statistics of port 1 IGS 10020MT gt security network dhcp snooping statistics 1 Port 1 Statistics 435 O Tx Discover O Tx Offer O Tx Request O Tx Decline 0 Tx ACK 0 Tx NAK O Tx Release 0 Tx Inform Rx Lease Query O Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned O Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown 0 Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active O Tx Lease Active User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Description Show IP source guard configuration Syntax Security Network IP Source Guard Configuration Security Network IP Source Guard Mode Description Set or show IP source gu
496. ttps redirect enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration IGS 10020MT gt security switch access configuration 387 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Access Mgmt Configuration System Access Mode Disabled System Access number of entries 0 Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management default Show access management mode Default Setting disable Example Enable access management function IGS 10020MT gt security switch access mode enable Security Switch Access Configuration Description Show access management configuration Syntax Security Switch Access Configuration Example Show access management configuration IGS 10020MT gt security switch access configuration 388 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Access Mgmt Configuration System Access Mode Disabled W WEB HTTPS S SNMP T TELNET SSH End IP Address Security Switch Access Mode Description Set or show the access management mode Syntax Security Switch Access Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable access management disable Disable access management defaul
497. turn to the web main page without reboot the system 85 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules
498. twork access control and authentication and Secure Management features to protect customer s industrial and building automation network connectivity with reliable switching recovery capability that is suitable for implementing fault tolerant and mesh network architectures 20 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Fast Recovery to a Redundant Ethernet Network The IGS 10020MT features strong and self recovery capability to prevent interruptions and outside intrusions It incorporates Rapid Spanning Protocol RSTP Multiple Spanning Tree MSTP dynamic port Link Aggregation and Redundant Power System into customers industrial automation network to enhance system reliability and uptime in the harsh factory environments It also protects customer s industrial network connectivity with switching recovery capability that is used for implementing fault tolerant ring and mesh network architectures Environmentally Hardened Design With IP30 aluminum industrial case protection the IGS 10020MT provides a high level of immunity against electromagnetic interference and heavy electrical surges which are usually found on plant floors or in curb side traffic control cabinets It also possesses an integrated power supply source with wide range of voltages 12 to 48V DC or 24V AC for worldwide high availability applications requiring dual or backup power inputs Being able to operate under the temperature range from 40 to 75 Degree C the IGS 10020MT can
499. ty Network NAS EapolTimeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Security Network NAS EapolTimeout lt eapol_timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 65535 seconds default Show current EAPOL retransmission timeout Default Setting 30 420 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set the time between EAPOL retransmissions for 100sec IGS 10020MT gt security network nas eapoltimeout 100 Security Network NAS Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Security Network NAS Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks for activitiy on a MAC address that succeeded autentication default Show current age time Default Setting 300 Example Set NAS age time in 1000sec IGS 10020MT gt security network nas agetime 1000 Security Network NAS Holdtime Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Security Network NAS Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire default Show current hold time Default Setting 10 421 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Example Set NAS hold time in 100sec IGS 10020MT gt security network nas holdtime 100 Security Net
500. upgrade firmware DO NOT Power OFF the Industrial Managed Switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after the image be g7 loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 78 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 18 Configuration Backup This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Industrial Managed Switch to the local management station The Configuration Backup screen in Figure 4 2 22 appears Configuration Save Save Configuration Figure 4 2 22 Configuration Save Page Screenshot You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt etc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of
501. ur comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit Without removing power cable the device will still consuming power from the power source In the view of Saving the Energy and reduce the unnecessary power consuming it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of th
502. urce Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears e TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value e TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value 224 e TCP UDP Destination Filter User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UD
503. ure 2 2 Reset button of Industrial Managed Switch 1 Press the RESET button once The Industrial Managed Switch will reboot automatically ES 2 Press the RESET button for 5 seconds The Industrial Managed Switch will back to the factory default mode the entire configuration will be erased 30 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 1 3 LED Indicators Em System 1 D Color Function Ph Green Indicate the power 1 has power P2 Green ndicate the power 2 has power Fault Green Indicate the either power 1 or power 2 has no power m Per 10 100 1000Base T Port Color Function Light Indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Indicate that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Light Indicate that the port is successfully connecting to the gn network at 1000Mbps Orange Indicate that the port is successfully connecting to the network at 10Mbps or 100Mbps m Per SFP Interface Color Function Light Indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT 3 Bink deme that the Switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Light Indicate that the port is successfully connecting to the gn network at 1000Mbps Orange Indicate that the port is successfully connecting to the network at 100Mbps 31 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 1 4 Switch Upper Panel The Upper Panel of the Indu
504. uter can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network Multicast Receiver Multicast a w Switch Transmitter AS SZ _ gt IPTV E Server Router Switch Switch Y lt ulticast Receiver Switch Cit Multicast gt Receiver D Figure 4 8 1 Multicast Service 165 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT B a Multicast z Receiver Multicast Switch Transmitter A IPTV Server Router Switch C Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 2 Multicast Flooding B Multicast Receiver Multicast IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A _A IPTV ja a ir IGMP Snoopin a Switch C IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 8 3 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control 166 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query
505. uter sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server 550 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protoco
506. uthentication password configure Syntax SMTP Auth_pass lt auth_pass_text gt Parameters lt auth_pass_text gt SMTP Authentication Password Default Setting disable SMTP Mailfrom Description Set or show SMTP e mail from configure Syntax SMTP Mailfrom lt mailfrom_text gt 536 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Parameters lt mailfrom_text gt SMTP E mail From address Default Setting disable SMTP Mailsubject Description Set or show SMTP e mail subject configure Syntax SMTP Mailsubject lt mailsubject_text gt Parameters lt mailsubject_text gt SMTP E mail Subject Default Setting disable SMTP Mailto1 Description Set or show SMTP e mail 1 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto1 lt mailto1_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP e mail 1 to address Default Setting disable SMTP Mailto2 Description Set or show SMTP e mail 2 to configure Syntax SMTP Mailto2 lt mailto2_text gt Parameters lt mailto1_text gt SMTP e mail 2 to address 537 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Default Setting disable SMTP Test Description Test the status for linking to SMTP server Syntax SMTP Test 538 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Industrial Managed Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is use
507. utton in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked e Key Parameters Key configuration is described as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 205 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT mb Any Ethernet LLC SNAP IPv4 IPv6 D ol FS amp N Note All frame types are explained below e Any Allow all types of frames e Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within Ox600 OxFFFF or Any but excluding 0x800 IPv4 and O0x86DD IPv6 default value is Any e LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00
508. ve if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds e EAPOL Timeout Determines the time between retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports e Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in a 802 1X based mode this is not so criticial since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age 237 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT the entry e Hold Time This
509. ve or late collisions Click to refresh the page immediately clear J Clears the counters for all ports Auto refresh Lt Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 104 4 4 6 SFP Information User s Manual of IGS 10020MT You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed and wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a speficic interface The SFP Module Information screen in Figure 4 4 6 appears SFP Module Information Wave Length nm Distance m Auto Refresh C Figure 4 4 6 SFP Module Information for Switch Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are M 1000Base SX M 1000Base LX NW 100Base FX e Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or description is get from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might shows different speed information e Wave Length nm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed e Distance m Buttons
510. ver 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Responses Requests Malformed Responses Retransmissions Bad Authenticators Pending Requests Unknown Types Timeouts Packets Dropped IP Address 0 0 0 0 1813 State Disabled Round Trip Time 0 ms Auto refresh 7 Figure 4 11 9 RADIUS Authentication Accounting for Server Overview Page Screenshot 259 The page includes the following fields RADIUS Authentication Servers User s Manual of IGS 10020MT The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Object Description e Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4668 Name Description Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Accepts ccessAccepts Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Access Rejects radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS ccessRejects Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Access radiusAuthClientExtA The number of RADIUS Challenges ccessChallenges Access Challenge packets valid or invalid received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAuthClientExt The number of malformed Access MalformedAccessRe RADIUS Access Response Responses sponses packets received from the server Malformed packets
511. ver gt lt file_name gt check Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Configuration file name check Check configuration file only default Check and apply file 503 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 18 Firmware Command Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax Firmware Load lt ip_addr_string gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_addr_string gt IP host address a b c d or a host name string lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware IPv6 Load Description Load new firmware from IPv6 TFTP server Syntax Firmware IPv6 Load lt ipv6_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ipv6_server gt TFTP server IPv6 address lt file_name gt Firmware file name Firmware Information Description Display information about active and alternate firmware images Syntax Firmware Information Firmware Swap Description Activate the alternate firmware image 504 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Syntax Firmware Swap 6 19 UPnP Command UPnP Configuration Description Show UPnP configuration Syntax UPnP Configuration Example Show UPnP configuration IGS 10020MT gt upnp configuration UPnP Configuration Disabled 4 UPnP Advertising Duration 100 UPnP Mode Description Set or show the UPnP mode Syntax UPnP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable UPnP di
512. viously saved values 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address The MAC Address Table screen in Figure 4 13 2 appears MAC Address Table Start from VLAN 1 and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members E rentes 7 ype vian mac address _lepula 2 a a s 6 7 9 o Static 00 30 4F 10 02 00 Static 33 33 FF 10 02 00 7 Static 33 33 FF A8 D0 64 vy Dynamic 40 61 86 04 18 69 Y Static FF FF FF FF FF FF Y Y Y f IYI x Figure 4 13 2 MAC Address Table Status Page Screenshot Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address
513. w LACP role Default Setting active Example Set passive for port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP status of port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt lacp status 1 4 Port Mode Key Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port 464 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port RxFrames TxFrames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal 465 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 6 11 LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LLDP configuration of port1 4 IGS 10020MT gt Ildp configuration 1 4 LLDP Configuration Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
514. w for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch 255 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are Object Description o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation e Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server e Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS
515. w the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP Address of the entry e MAC Address Source MAC Address Buttons Auto refresh Ch Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Lk lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 297 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to
516. west VLAN ID gt gt gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 128 4 6 7 VLAN Port Status User s Manual of IGS 10020MT This page provides VLAN Port Staus The VLAN Port Status screen in Figure 4 6 5 appears VLAN Port Status for Static User Static PYID Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type UYID e 1 2 3 4 5 6 l 8 9 0 Zn Sn gt UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware UnAware Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto refresh C Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Untag_this Figure 4 6 5 VLAN Port Status for Static User Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 e Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID e Ingress Filtering Show the ingress filtering for a port This parameter affects VLAN ingr
517. witch has two SFP interfaces that supports 100 1000 dual speed mode Optional Multi mode Single mode 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP module Cabling Each 10 100 1000Base T ports use RJ 45 sockets similar to phone jacks for connection of unshielded twisted pair cable UTP The IEEE 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab Fast Gigabit Ethernet standard requires Category 5 UTP for 100Mbps 100Base TX 10Base T networks can use Cat 3 4 5 or 1000Base T use 5 5e 6 UTP see table below Maximum distance is 100meters 328 feet The 100Base FX 1000Base SX LX SFP slot is uses as LC connector with optional SFP module Please see table below and know more about the cable s specification Port Type Cable Type Connector 10Base T Cat 3 4 5 2 pair RJ 45 100Base TX Cat 5 UTP 2 pair RJ 45 1000Base T Cat 5 5e 6 UTP 2 pair RJ 45 100Base FX 50 125um or 62 5 125um multi mode 9 125um single mode LC Multi Single mode 1000Base SX LX 50 125um or 62 5 125um multi mode 9 125um single mode LC Multi Single mode Any Ethernet devices like hubs PCs can connect to the Industrial Managed Switch by using straight through wires The eight 10 100 1000Mbps ports are auto MDI MDI X can be used on straight through or crossover cable 38 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 2 5 1 Installing the SFP Transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You
518. with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt To connect to MFB F20 F40 F60 FA20 FB20 SFP transceiver use the single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable 1 2 Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot of the switch converter Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 100 Force is needed 2 5 2 Remove the Module Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Turn the handle of the MGB MFB module to horizontal Pull out the module gently through the handle MGB MFB Series Module Figure 2 6 Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Module Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull out the ga Rick module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the device ote 41 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter expla
519. work The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Hi Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default M Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the hos
520. work NAS RADIUS QoS Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned QoS Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_QoS global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned QoS setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned QoS setting default Show current per port RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned QoS either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned QoS enabledness Default Setting disable Example Enable NAS RADIUS QoS IGS 10020MT gt security network nas radius_qos enable Security Network NAS RADIUS VLAN Description Set or show either global enabledness use the global keyword or per port enabledness of RADIUS assigned VLAN Syntax Security Network NAS RADIUS_VLAN global lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters global Select the global RADIUS assigned VLAN setting lt port_list gt Select the per port RADIUS assigned VLAN setting 422 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT default Show current per port RADIUS assigned VLAN enabledness enable Enable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports disable Disable RADIUS assigned VLAN either globally or on one or more ports default Show current RADIUS assigned VLAN enable
521. ws My Network Places 4 2 8 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP Relay on this page DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options m Circuit ID option 1 m Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in stackable switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address The DHCP Relay 65 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT
522. wser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 7 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen g7 By default IE7 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to Note explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Industrial Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Indusirial Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Industrial Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC IGS Industrial Managed Switch RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 x IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 49 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT m Logging on the Industrial Managed Switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 7 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface Th
523. x 356 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps full duplex default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto Example Set 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT IGS 10020MT gt port mode 1 10hdx Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 IGS 10020MT gt port flow control 1 enable 357 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable port IGS 10020MT gt port state 1 disable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list
524. y Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately clear Clear all statistics 68 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 10 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using a SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samles are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG The CPU Load screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears CPU Load Suloretesh El 100ms 3 1sec 1 10sec 1 all numbers running average Buttons Auto refresh Cl Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds ee If your browser can not displies anythings in this page please download Adobe SVG tool and a install it in your computer Note 69 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT 4 2 11 System Log The switch system log information is provided here The System Log screen in Figure 4 2 14 appears System Log Information Auto refresh E Refresh Clear lt lt lt lt gt gt gt iaa E Clear Level A1 gt The total number of entries is 2 for the given level Start from ID 1 with 20 entries per p
525. y highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter associated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each 545 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Ra
526. y Switch Used prectndecdenderatssscneesds tine E TAE 380 Security Switch User Delete cios sin eee die ede de ecient tees 381 Security Switch Privilege Level Configuration ooooccnnncccnnoccconocccnnononnncnonannnn nono nc nano nn rr nano rr rn 381 Security Switch Privilege Level GrOUP oooooccninocccnnoccccnononnncnonncnnnonnncnn non n nn nana nn nr anna rre rre 383 User s Manual of IGS 10020MT Security Switch Privilege Level CurTeNt ooccooonccnnnncccnnnoncncnonacnno nono ncnnnon cnn nono nn nr nn nro rre rar 383 Security Switch Auth Configuration ooononcccnnonicononcccnononnnnnnnannnn nono nc nono nr r rra rre rre 383 Security Switch Auth Methods eiiie a i Avda 384 Security Switch SSH Configuration 0 cece cece ee eeneeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeeeesneeeenenaeeseeenaees 385 security Switch SSH Mode iia fasciitis see die ded thie ee eee elt 385 Security Switch HTTPs Configuration inesi rniii ieia ei ai i aanita 386 Security Switch HT EPS MOG i secs sgeesesesteieescctenacs he tdci 386 security switch FET PS REdIneCE cidcid Asatte Reeth ie adie eee 387 Security Switch Access Configuration oooccconocccnnonoccnononcncnonancno nono nnnn nn n nr nano rre rre 387 Security Switch Access Mode siias innin naa naea E AEN EAEE EAEE EFAA AE A ER A AAE A AOTER AE AEN nA 388 Security Switch Access Configurations eii ici iio cita 388 Security Switch ACCESS Mode iren ce eeeeeeceenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaae
527. y one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The Port Security Detail screen in Figure 4 12 7 appears The page includes the following fields MAC Address VLAN ID Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Port Security Port Status Port 1 Poti v Auto refresh O Figure 4 12 7 Port Security Detail Screen Page Screenshot Object Description e MAC Address amp VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed e State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port Buttons e Age Hold f If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to
528. y one profile can be assigned to a port When enabled MLD join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested multicast group is permitted the MLD join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the MLD join report is dropped MLD throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new MLD join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 13 appears MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Filtering Groups Add New Filtering Group Reset Figure 4 8 13 MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Port The logical port for the settings e Filtering Group The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered Buttons Add New Filtering Grou g P Click to add a new entry to the Group Filtering table Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously save

User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents